DMP 128 Plus C AT - Uncategorized Extron - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL DMP 128 Plus C AT Extron

Mixers and Processors

DMP 128 Plus

12x8 ProDSP Digital Matrix Processor

Extron network equipment chassis with multiple Ethernet ports and indicator lights (no readable text or symbols)

Safety Instructions

Safety Instructions • English

WARNING: This symbol, ,when used on the product, is intended to alert the user of the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product's enclosure that may present a risk of electric shock.

TENTION: This symbol, when used on the product, is intended to alert the user of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature provided with the equipment.

For information on safety guidelines, regulatory compliances, EMI/EMF compatibility, accessibility, and related topics, see the Extron Safety and Regulatory Compliance Guide, part number 68-290-01, on the Extron website, www.extron.com.

© 2017-2018 Extron Electronics. All rights reserved.

Trademarks

All trademarks mentioned in this guide are the properties of their respective owners. The following registered trademarks (®), registered service marks (SM), and trademarks (TM) are the property of RGB Systems, Inc. or Extron Electronics (see the current list of trademarks on the Terms of Use page at www.extron.com):

Registered Trademarks ^

Extron, Cable Cubby, ControlScript, CrossPoint, DTP, eBUS, EDID Manager, EDID Minder, Flat Field, FlexOS, Glitch Free. Global Configurator, Global Scripter, GlobalViewer, Hideaway, HyperLane, IP Intercom, IP Link, Key Minder, LinkLicense, LockIt, MediaLink, MediaPort, NetPA, PlenumVault, PoleVault, PowerCage, PURE3, Quantum, Show Me, SoundField, SpeedMount, SpeedSwitch, StudioStation, System INTEGRATOR, TeamWork, TouchLink, V-Lock, VideoLounge, VN-Matrix, VoiceLift, WallVault, WindoWall, XTP, XTP Systems, and ZipClip

Registered Service Mark ^SM : S3 Service Support Solutions

Trademarks ^TM

AAP, AFL (Accu-Rate Frame Lock), ADSP (Advanced Digital Sync Processing), Auto-Image, CableCover, CDRS (Class D Ripple Suppression), Codec Connect, DDSP (Digital Display Sync Processing), DMI (Dynamic Motion Interpolation), Driver Configurator, DSP Configurator, DSVP (Digital Sync Validation Processing), eLink, Entwine, EQIP, Everlast, FastBite, FOX, FOXBOX, IP Intercom HelpDesk, MAAP, MicroDigital, Opti-Torque, PendantConnect, ProDSP, QS-FPC (QuickSwitch Front Panel Controller), Room Agent, Scope-Trigger, ShareLink, SIS, Simple Instruction Set, Skew-Free, SpeedNav, Triple-Action Switching, True4K, Vector ^TM 4K , WebShare, XTRA, and ZipCaddy

FCC Class A Notice

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. The Class A limits provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference. This interference must be corrected at the expense of the user.

Battery Notice

This product contains a battery. Do not open the unit to replace the battery. If the battery needs replacing, return the entire unit to Extron (for the correct address, see the Extron Warranty section on the last page of this guide).

CAUTION: Risk of explosion. Do not replace the battery with an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.

Conventions Used in this Guide

Notifications

The following notifications are used in this guide:

CAUTION: Risk of minor personal injury.

NOTE: A note draws attention to important information.

TIP: A tip provides a suggestion to make working with the application easier.

Software Commands

Commands are written in the fonts shown here:

^AR Merge Scene,,∅p1 scene 1,1 ^B 51 ^W^C.∅ [∅1] R∅∅4∅03∅0∅04∅0∅08∅0∅06∅0 [∅2] 35 [17] [∅3]

Esc X1 * X17 * X20 * X23 * X21 CE ←

NOTE: For commands and examples of computer or device responses used in this guide, the character “∅” is used for the number zero and “O” is the capital letter “o.”

Computer responses and directory paths that do not have variables are written in the font shown here:

Reply from 208.132.180.48: bytes=32 times=2ms TTL=32 C:\Program Files\Extron

Variables are written in slanted form as shown here:

ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -t SOH R Data STX Command ETB ETX

Selectable items, such as menu names, menu options, buttons, tabs, and field names are written in the font shown here:

From the File menu, select New. Click the OK button.

Specifications Availability

Product specifications are available on the Extron website, www.extron.com.

Extron Glossary of Terms

A glossary of terms is available at http://www.extron.com/technology/glossary.aspx.

Contents

Introduction......1

About this Guide....1

About the DMP 128 Plus....1

Features 2

Application Diagram 3

Installation....4

DMP 128 Plus Models....4

Mounting 4

Rear Panel Features and Cabling....5

Front Panel Features....8

Hardware Reset Modes....9

Mode 1 — Firmware Reset......9

Mode 4 — IP Reset....9

Mode 5 — Factory Default Reset......9

DSP Configurator Software....10

Downloading and Installing DSP Configurator....10

Accessing the DSP Configurator Help File ...... 12

DSP Configurator Main Workspace 12

Menu Bar 13

File 13

Edit....14

View 14

Tools....15

Window 16

Help 16

Macros Drop-Down 17

Presets Drop-Down 17

DSP Configurator Status Panel....17

Live and Emulate Panel.... 18

DSP Configurator Inputs....21

Mic/Line Inputs....21

Naming an Input Channel 22

Input Building Blocks 22

Input Processing....24

Input Gain Block 24

Input Filter Block....26

Input AEC Block (C Models Only)......28

Input Dynamics Blocks 32

Input Delay Block....37

Input Ducking Block 38

Input Automix Block 40

Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block 42

Aux Inputs 43

Renaming an Aux Input 43

Aux Input Building Blocks 44

Aux Input Processing....44

Aux Input Gain Block 44

Aux Input Filter Block....47

Aux Input Dynamics Block 47

Aux Input Ducking Block.... 47

Aux Input Automix Block.... 47

Aux Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block 47

Virtual Returns 48

Renaming a Virtual Return 48

Virtual Return Building Blocks 49

Virtual Return Processing 49

Virtual Return Feedback Suppressor Block....49

Virtual Return Filter Block....53

Virtual Return Dynamics Block....53

Virtual Return Delay Block 53

Virtual Return Pre-Mixer Gain Block....53

Expansion and AT Inputs 53

Renaming an Expansion or AT Input 54

Expansion and AT Inputs Overview....54

Expansion and AT Inputs Processing....55

Mix-Points 55

Mix-Point Dialog Box 57

Mix-Point Context Menu 58

DSP Configurator Outputs....58

Outputs 59

Naming an Output 59

Output Building Blocks 59

Output Processing....60

Output Trim Block....61

Output Delay Block....61

Output Filter Block....61

Output Dynamics Block....62

Output Attenuation Block.... 62

Aux Outputs 63

Naming an Aux Output 63

Aux Output Processing....64

Aux Output Trim Block....64

Aux Output Filter Block....64

Aux Output Dynamics Block 64

Aux Output Gain Block 64

Expansion Outputs....65

Naming an Expansion Output 65

Expansion Output Processing....66

Expansion Output Trim Block....66

Expansion Output Delay Block....66

Expansion Output Filter Block....66

Expansion Output Dynamics Block....66

Expansion Output Attenuation Block 66

Virtual Send Bus....66

Configuration Tools....67

Presets....67

Methods for Marking Items 68

Configuring Presets 68

Groups 69

Configuring Groups 70

Digital I/O 72

Configuring Digital I/O....73

Players 75

Configuring Players....76

Macros....78

Configuring a Macro 79

Device Manager 82

Managing Devices in Device Manager......83

Connect to or Disconnect from Device 85

Firmware Loader 85

Downloading Firmware Updates....85

Organize Building Blocks....88

Device Settings.... 90

Unit Info....90

IP Settings 90

Passwords 91

Serial Settings 91

Date/Time 92

Dante Device 92

Options 93

Expansion Bus 94

Connecting the EXP Ports 94

Phone Dialer....96

Placing a Call with the Phone Dialer....97

Receiving a Call with the Phone Dialer ..... 97

Audio Control Panels (ACP) 98

ACP Panel Types 98

Panel ID #....99

ACP Panel Button Control Types 99

Action-Fixed 99

Action-Follow Selector....100

Selector-Vol/Mute (Selector)....100

Button Labels 100

Using Multiple ACP Panels 100

Configuration Examples....100

ACP 100 Configuration Example....101

ACP 106 Style Configuration Example ...... 103

Saving and Pushing ACP Configurations ..... 106

Dante Controller ....107

Overview 107

Downloading and Installing Dante Controller .... 108

Configuring the DMP 128 Plus AT in Dante

Controller....110

Device Name 110

Receiver and Transmitter Names 110

Dante Controller Naming Conventions ...... 110

Renaming the DMP 128 Plus AT in Dante

Controller....111

Renaming a Receiver or Transmitter...... 113

Finding a Dante Device IP Address 115

Physical Dante Network Setup 116

Redundant Configuration....117

Dante Controller Operation 118

Dante Transmitters and Receivers......118

Dante Routing Operation 119

Routing Devices.... 119

Disconnecting Inputs from Outputs....120

Dante Troubleshooting....121

Simplifying the Network for Troubleshooting 121

Troubleshooting the Network Interface......121

Restarting Dante Controller....122

Remote Communication and Control.....123

Connection Options....123

RS-232 Port 124

LAN Port 124

USB Config Port 125

Verbose Modes 125

Host-to-Device Communications....126

DMP 128 Plus-initiated Messages ...... 126

Using the Command and Response Tables ..... 127

Symbol Definitions 127

Error Responses....128

Simple Control Port Commands 128

Command and Response Table Sections ..... 129

Command and Response Table for Basic SIS Commands 129

DSP SIS Commands 141

Symbol Definitions....141

Special Characters 142

Command and Response Table for DSP SIS Commands 143

Command and Response Table for VoIP SIS Commands 148

Object ID (OID) Number Tables 150

Input Path OIDs 150

Output Path OIDs 151

Automixer OIDs 152

Mix-point OIDs.... 154

Web Pages....164

DMP 128 Plus Web Page 164

Accessing the Embedded Web Page......164

Using the Web Page....165

DMP 128 Plus VoIP Web Page....167

Accessing the Embedded VoIP Web Page...167

Using the VoIP Web Page....168

Special Characters 178

Introduction

This section describes this user guide and the DMP 128 Plus. The following topics are covered:

• About this Guide
  • About the DMP 128 Plus
• Features
  • Application Diagram

About this Guide

This guide contains installation, configuration, and operating information for the Extron DMP 128 Plus ProDSP Digital Audio Matrix Processor. In this guide, the DMP 128 Plus may also be referred to as "DMP 128," "the mixer," or "device."

About the DMP 128 Plus

The Extron DMP 128 Plus Digital Audio Matrix Processor is a 12x8 audio mixer with broad I/O expansion capabilities including:

• 8 auxiliary inputs via VoIP (V models only), USB, and internal audio files
  • 16 x16 expansion bus
  • Dante 48x24 AT channels (AT models only)
• VoIP (V models only)
• Digital I/O

The DMP 128 Plus features Extron ProDSP, automixing, AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation), and USB audio for use as an audio-to-PC interface. The DMP 128 Plus offers a configuration approach to DSP to simplify mixing, routing, conferencing, and room optimization. Quick and intuitive configuration using the Extron DSP Configurator software allows the DMP 128 Plus to be installed in very little time with easy-to-learn adjustments that can be applied in real-time. A digital audio expansion port (EXP) allows two EXP-capable devices to be linked together to expand input and output signal management and routing capabilities. The DMP 128 Plus is ideal for presentation and conferencing applications in boardrooms, courtrooms, and conference centers requiring advanced matrix mixing and DSP.

In addition to EXP expansion capabilities, DMP 128 Plus AT models allow connection to a Dante audio network for transporting audio across a TCP/IP network. This further increases the DMP 128 Plus input and output expansion capabilities.

DMP 128 Plus V models can register up to 8 VoIP lines per device. The DMP 128 Plus V can function as a VoIP interface, removing the need for dedicated VoIP hardware.

The DMP 128 Plus has no front panel controls. All configuration is performed using the Extron DSP Configurator software from a host computer via Ethernet (recommended) or USB. The rear panel RS-232 port allows for serial control via SIS commands. Signal presence and clip LEDs for the twelve input channels and eight output channels are on the front panel. Status indicators for EXP, LAN, and USB audio are also on the front panel.

Features

• 12 mic/line inputs — on 3.5 mm 3-pole and 6-pole captive screw connectors.
- 8 line level outputs — on 3.5 mm 6-pole connectors.
- Extensive 52x48 internal mix matrix —A single DMP 128 Plus can be used as the central audio processor for a sizeable system.
- USB audio interface — The DMP 128 Plus provides up to 4 channels of digital audio sends and returns for simplifying implementation of systems with soft-codec conferencing or computer based audio.
- AEC on input channels 1 - 8 (C models only) — Acoustic echo cancellation and selectable noise cancellation with advanced algorithms allow fast convergence in challenging situations including double-talk and the use of wireless microphones.
- VoIP capability supporting Session Initiation Protocol (V models only) — A single DMP 128 Plus V model can be used for a single VoIP line or as a VoIP farm for up to 8 rooms.
- AT models include 48x24 Dante™ digital audio network expansion — 48 Dante inputs (Rx) and 24 Dante outputs (Tx) via a 4-port gigabit switch allow flexibility in building large audio DSP systems with multiple DMP, AXP, and AXI units.
- Remote port for ACP control panels — For audio systems that do not need a full control system, Extron Audio Control Panels (ACP) offer flexible audio control, interfaced directly with the DMP 128 Plus. Available panels are: ACP 100, ACP 106 D, ACP 106 EU, and ACP 106 MK.
- Macros — Command sequences can be sent to the local device and external devices via the LAN port. This allows a single DMP 128 Plus to act as the central interface from a control system, sending commands to other DMP 128 Plus and DTP CrossPoint units.
- 8 Aux I/O ports — Configurable digital audio connectivity allows these ports to be configured as VoIP audio (V models only), USB communications audio, USB playback audio, or audio file players.
- Advanced audio processing on all 8 analog outputs and all 16 direct EXP outputs — Up to 24 speaker zones can be implemented on one DMP 128 Plus with full processing for each zone.
- 8 audio file players — Up to 8 audio file players can be used to play back audio files for system setup or as part of the system design. Pink noise, white noise, and sine waves are included with the device. Any WAV, AIFF, or MP3 files up to 24-bit 48 kHz can be uploaded.
- 16 virtual processing loops – Virtual loops allows great flexibility in sub-mixing and processing.
- Lower latency — Newer, faster, and more powerful DSP chips mean maximum performance resulting in a lower latency of 16 ms when fully loaded.
- Adaptive gain — A new adaptive gain processor that allows a given microphone input to affect levels on any one or all other inputs and virtual returns, ensuring background music and paging are the right volume, whether the room is quiet or noisy.

Application Diagram

Extron network architecture diagram showing connections between Extron SF 26CT, Extron DMP 128 Plus C V, and Extron DTP CrossPoint 82 4K IPCP MA modules with key devices like CPU, speakers, and Ethernet.

Figure 1. DMP 128 Plus Application Diagram

Installation

This section describes the installation of the DMP 128 Plus and covers the following topics:

• DMP 128 Plus Models
- Mounting
• Rear Panel Features and Cabling
- Front Panel Features
• Hardware Reset Modes

DMP 128 Plus Models

Model Description
DMP 128 Plus 12x8 ProDSP Processor
DMP 128 Plus C 12x8 ProDSP Processor with Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)
DMP 128 Plus C V 12x8 ProDSP Processor with AEC and VoIP
DMP 128 Plus AT 12x8 ProDSP Processor with Dante
DMP 128 Plus C AT 12x8 ProDSP Processor with AEC and Dante
DMP 128 Plus C V AT 12x8 ProDSP Processor with AEC, VoIP and Dante

Mounting

The 1U high, full rack width, 8.5 inch deep DMP 128 Plus mounts in the following manners:

• Rack mounting — Attach the DMP 128 Plus to a standard 19-inch rack shelf. The following Underwriters Laboratories (UL) guidelines pertain to the installation of the DMP 128 Plus in a rack:
• Reduced air flow — Install the equipment in the rack so that the amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.
• Mechanical loading — Mount the equipment in the racks so that uneven mechanical loading does not create a hazardous condition.
• Circuit overloading — When connecting the equipment to the supply circuit, consider the effect that circuit overloading might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring. Consider equipment nameplate ratings when addressing this concern.
• Reliable earthing (grounding) — Maintain reliable grounding of rack-mounted equipment. Pay particular attention to power supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (such as the use of power strips).
• Under-furniture mounting — Mount the DMP 128 Plus under the surface of a desk, table, or podium.
• Free-standing — Attach the four rubber feet provided with the device to the bottom of the DMP 128 Plus in the four corners and place the unit on furniture as desired.

NOTE: To mount the DMP 128 Plus using an Extron mounting kit, see the instructions provided with the kit.

Rear Panel Features and Cabling

Power Inlet Digital I/O Ports Mic/Line Inputs Line Outputs EXP Port ACP Port RS-232 Port LAN Ports AT Ports (AT models only) USB Audio Port Reset Button and LED

Figure 2. DMP 128 Plus Rear Panel

A Power Inlet — IEC power connection, 100 to 240 VAC, 50-60 Hz.
B Digital I/O Ports — Connect up to eight 4-pole 3.5 mm captive screw connectors. These configurable digital input and output ports are designed to connect to microphones with logic circuitry for mic mute and tally back functionality. Each port provides a common ground (see Digital I/O on page 72).

In G O1 O2 Digital I/O Connector

Figure 3. Digital I/O Connector

C Mic/Line Inputs — On inputs 1 through 8, use 3-pole 3.5 mm captive screw connectors to connect eight mono balanced or unbalanced microphone or line level sources (see figure 4 below for wiring). Inputs 1 through 8 provide AEC (C models only) and phantom power.

On inputs 9 through 12, use 6-pole 3.5 mm captive screw connectors to connect up to four mono balanced or unbalanced microphone or line level sources, or two stereo sources (see figure 5 below for wiring).

Tip Ring Sleeve 3" (5 mm) MAX. (typ) Balanced Input Tip Sleeve Jumper Unbalanced Input

Figure 4. 3-pole Audio Input Wiring

Tip Ring Sleeve Tip Ring Sleeve Balanced Input Tip Sleeve Jumper Tip Sleeve Jumper Balanced Input

Figure 5. 6-pole Audio Input Wiring

ATTENTION:

D Line Outputs — Use 6-pole 3.5 mm captive screw connectors to connect up to eight mono balanced or unbalanced line level devices or four stereo devices (see figure 6 and figure 7 below for wiring).

Tip Ring Sleeve Balanced Output Tip NO Ground Here Sleeve Unbalanced Output

Figure 6. 3-pole Audio Output Wiring

Tip Ring Sleeve Tip Ring Sleeve + - + - + - Tip NO Ground Here Sleeve Tip NO Ground Here Sleeve + - - Balanced Output Unbalanced Output

Figure 7. 6-pole Audio Output Wiring

ATTENTION:

• For unbalanced audio, connect the sleeves to the ground contact. DO NOT connect the sleeves to the negative (−) contacts.
• Pour l'audio asymétrique, connectez les manchons au contact au sol. Ne PAS connecter les manchons aux contacts négatifs (-).

E EXP Port — One RJ-45 port allows two units to be connected via a shielded CAT 6 cable to form a larger matrix system (1 foot cable included). Any Extron device with EXP capability can exchange audio with a DMP 128 Plus via the EXP port.
F ACP Port — Use a 4-pole 3.5 mm captive screw connector to connect an ACP control device for configuration via DSP Configurator (see Audio Control Panels (ACP) on page 98).

+V +12 VDC +S + Signal -S - Signal G Ground

Figure 8. ACP Port Connector Wiring

G RS-232 Port — Use a 3-pole 3.5 mm captive screw connector to connect the host RS-232 cable for bidirectional RS-232 (±5V) serial control (see figure 9 below for wiring). The default baud rate is 38400.

Tx Rx G Transmit Receive Ground REMOTE RS-232 Tx Rx G

Figure 9. RS-232 Wiring Example

H LAN Ports — One (non-V models) or two (V models) RJ-45 ports provide a Gigabit network connection for control and VoIP traffic. The host PC or control system and the DMP 128 Plus must be connected to the same network. Two LEDs indicate status.

NOTE: Only DMP 128 Plus V models have two LAN/VoIP ports. Non-V models only have a single LAN port.

LAN 1 defaults:

IP Address Subnet	Mask Default Gateway DHCP
192.168.254.254 255	5.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 OFF

LAN 2 defaults:

IP Address Subnet	Mask Default Gateway DHCP
192.168.1.254 255.2	55.255.0 0.0.0.0 OFF

There are three ways the dual LAN ports can be configured on DMP 128 Plus V models:

1. Control and VoIP traffic on one LAN port — Both control and VoIP traffic can be transported via a single LAN port.

NOTE: By default, control and VoIP traffic are both transported on LAN 1.

1. Control and VoIP traffic on one LAN port using a VLAN — Both control and VoIP traffic can be transported via a single physical LAN port while utilizing a VLAN for VoIP traffic.
2. Control and VoIP traffic on separate LAN ports — Control and VoIP traffic can be transported on separate LAN ports with unique IP configurations.

1 AT Ports (AT models only) — Four RJ-45 ports form a Gigabit switch for use with a Dante network. The AT ports use Dante protocol for digital audio transport (AT) and allow the DMP 128 Plus AT to connect to a Dante audio network to form a larger matrix (see Dante Controller on page 107). The 4-port switch can be configured as two 2-port switches for redundant Dante configuration. In redundant configuration, audio traffic is duplicated. Ports 3 and 4 are the primary switch (PRI), ports 1 and 2 are the secondary switch (SEC) (see Redundant Configuration on page 117).
USB Audio Port — One mini USB type B port connects to a computer and allows the DMP 128 Plus to function as a 4x4 audio interface with a Windows or Mac computer. Available sample rates are 48 kHz/16-bit.
Reset Button and LED —The reset button returns the DMP 128 Plus to different tiers of default states. When using the reset button, the LED blinks to signify the different reset modes (see Hardware Reset Modes on page 9). When not displaying reset modes, the LED operates as a power indicator, matching the front panel power LED.

Front Panel Features

graph LR
    A["Extron"] --> B["Activity"]
    B --> C["INPUTS/OHPARG"]
    C --> D["CLP"]
    C --> E["Signal"]
    D --> F["DMP 128 Plus"]
    E --> F
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333

A Power LED

E USB Activity Indicator LED

B USB Config Port

F Input Indicator LEDs

© EXP Activity Indicator LED

G Output Indicator LEDs

D LAN Activity Indicator LED

Figure 10. DMP 128 Plus Front Panel

Power LED — Blinks during boot up and lights steadily when the DMP 128 Plus is operational.

B USB Config Port — One USB mini type B port is used for configuration. The USB config port can also be used for firmware updates.

EXP Activity Indicator LED — This green activity LED behaves differently depending on the model of DMP 128 Plus:

• non-AT Models

Off — The unit is not connected to a second EXP device.

On — The unit is connected to a second EXP device and is configured as the primary unit.

Blinking — The unit is connected to a second EXP device and is configured as the secondary unit.

- AT Models

On — The unit is connected to a second EXP non-AT device and is configured as the primary unit.

Blinking — The unit is not connected to a second device.

D LAN Activity Indicator LED — Blinks to indicate rear panel LAN port activity.

USB Activity Indicator LED —Blinks to indicate audio streaming over USB.

F Input Indicator LEDs — Stacked green and red LEDs display input signal presence and input signal clipping.

The green signal presence LED varies in brightness, corresponding to the real-time input signal level. It lights at -60 dBFS and increases in brightness until signal level reaches -3 dBFS. When the signal reaches or exceeds -3 dBFS, the red clip LED lights. The clip LED remains lit for 200 ms after receiving the clip signal.

Output Indicator LEDs — Stacked green and red LEDs display output signal presence and output signal clipping.

Output indicator LEDs function identically to the input indicator LEDs (see F above).

Hardware Reset Modes

NOTE: The reset modes listed below close all IP connections, Telnet connections, and sockets.

Mode 1 — Firmware Reset

Hold the Reset button while applying power to restore the unit firmware back to the default factory firmware. This recovers a unit that has incorrect code or updated firmware running. All user files and settings are maintained.

Mode 4 — IP Reset

With power on, press and hold the Reset button until the reset LED blinks twice (\~6 seconds). Release the button and, within 1 second, press it again to reset all IP address settings to factory default.

The following changes take place:

• ARP program capability is enabled
- Sets IP back to factory default (192.168.254.254)
- Sets subnet mask back to factory default (255.255.255.0)
- Sets gateway back to factory default (0.0.0.0)
- Turns DHCP off
- Sets digital I/O port mapping back to factory default

If a second momentary press does not occur within 1 second, Mode 4 is exited.

Mode 5 — Factory Default Reset

With power on, press and hold the Reset button until the reset LED blinks 3 times (\~9 seconds). Release the button and, within 1 second, press it again to return the DMP 128 Plus to factory default conditions.

The following changes take place:

• Sets all IP settings back to factory default (see Mode 4 above)
• Mix-points are set to unit gain (0 dBFS) and the following connections are made
• Input 1 is routed to output 1
  • Input 2 is routed to output 2
  • Input 3 is routed to output 3
  • Input 4 is routed to output 4

• Input 5 is routed to output 5
  • Input 6 is routed to output 6
  • Input 7 is routed to output 7
  • Input 8 is routed to output 8

• All audio inputs are set to unity gain

• All outputs are unmuted and set to unity gain
• Any inserted or active DSP is removed
• All preset and group master memory is cleared

DSP Configurator Software

The DMP 128 Plus has no front panel hardware controls. To configure and operate the DMP 128 Plus, use a PC running Microsoft® Windows® 7 or newer and Extron DSP Configurator software. This section describes Extron DSP Configurator software and covers the following topics:

• Downloading and Installing DSP Configurator
• Expansion and AT Inputs
• Accessing the DSP Configurator Help File • Mix-Points
• DSP Configurator Main Workspace • DSP Configurator Outputs
• Menu Bar • Outputs
• DSP Configurator Inputs
• Output Processing
  • Mic/Line Inputs • Aux Outputs
• Input Processing • Aux Output Processing
• Aux Inputs • Expansion Outputs
• Aux Input Processing • Expansion Output Processing
  • Virtual Returns • Virtual Send Bus
  • Virtual Return Processing

Downloading and Installing DSP Configurator

1. From www.extron.com, click the Download tab (see figure 11, ①).
2. On the left sidebar, click the DSP Configurator link (②).

Extron Electronics INTERFACING SWITCHING AND CONTROL Products Training Markets Tech Library Company Download S3 Support Hotline [phone] Download Software Dastic Controller DSP Configurator Software Global Configurator Global Configurator Professional GUI Configurator GUI Designer IP Service/VeriCore Software PCS XTP System Configuration Software Control System Drivers Services HD Modules Resources GUI Design Resources Technical Hardware Themes Architectural Design Resources Download XTP System Configuration Software Software for the Complete Setup and Configuration of XTP Systems Learn more Download XTP System Configuration Software The XTP System Configuration Software is a simple software but for the complete setup and configuration of XTP Systems. Global Configurator Professional Software is a simple software but for the complete setup and configuration of XTP Systems. Streaming Content Manager Software, Control System Drivers, Firmware, HID Modules

Figure 11. DSP Configurator Link on Download Page

1. On the DSP Configurator Software page, click Download (see figure 12, ③). The Download Center page opens.

Extron Electronics INTERPACING, SWITCHING AND CONTROL Log In 1 Sign In 9.3 Support Hotline [phone] Products Training Markets Tech Library Company Download Product Name Software Configuration Software DSP Configurator Software Product History Software Configuration Software DSP Configurator Software Product History DSP Configurator Software DSP Application Software Key Features Powerful yet user friendly PC-based software tool for managing audio setup and operations of an Extron (IUP) product Enables complete setup and configuration of digital audio processing tools Intuitive Graphical User Environment SpeedNow™ keyboard navigation Copy and padie for processing blocks DSP Configurator Presets less All Features + Featured Videos DSP Configurator Help Image Gallery 2 12.0.59 April 12, 2018 50.0.4MB RELEASE NOTES Downloaded Light Required SIMILAR PRODUCTS Davis Controls Configuration Software for Davis-Enabled Audio

Figure 12. DSP Configurator Download Page

1. From the Download Center page, DSP Configurator should begin downloading automatically. If it does not, select click here (see figure 13, 4).

NOTE: An Extron Insider account is required to download DSP Configurator and other software available from the Extron website. Login or account creation may be required before the Download Center page opens.

1. Select Run (⑤) to run the DSP Configurator installer. Select Save to save the install file to run at a later time.

Extron Electronics INTERRACING, SWITCHING AND CONTROL Products Training Markets Tech Library Company Download Extron Importer Download Home Software Code Controller DSP Configurator Software Global Configurator Global Configurator Professional GUI Configurator GUI Designer IP Telecom HelpDesk Software FOS ATP System Configurator Software Control Systems Drivers Firmware HID Modules Resources GUI Design Resources TouchLine Touchpanel Themes Architectural Design Resources Download Center Currently downloading DSP_ConfiguratorSetup_v2x12x3x39.exe. If your download does not automatically download here. Subscribers to receive an a mail notification when DSP Configurator is updated. Manage your preferences and subscribers. Back Help us your own extron DSP_ConfiguratorSetup_v2x12x3x39.exe (3.2 HCD non-expressed) This type of this work has your computer. Back Next Cancel

Figure 13. DSP Configurator Download Center Page

1. To run DSP Configurator from the default install location, click Start> Programs> Extron Electronics> DSP Configurator> DSP Configurator.

2. From the DSP Configurator splash screen drop-down menu (see figure 14, ⑥ below), select the model of DMP 128 Plus being connected to the host PC and click OK (⑦).

Extron® DSP Configurator Select the type of device you would like to configure: MSP TSP Plus C OK Cancel Always perform the selected action

Figure 14. DSP Configurator Splash Screen

Accessing the DSP Configurator Help File

DSP Configurator comes loaded with a context-sensitive help file that can be accessed by clicking the help icon () in the top right corner of any dialog box in DSP Configurator. Alternatively, click Help > Contents in the menu bar at the top of the main workspace, or press on your keyboard. This help file contains detailed procedures and further instruction on all DSP Configurator features.

DSP Configurator Main Workspace

The DSP Configurator main workspace can be divided up into four main sections (see figure 15). Each section contains various functions to configure the DMP 128 Plus. Due to the large number of inputs and outputs available on the DMP 128 Plus, not all channels can be viewed at the same time in a single window. Use the expand and collapse buttons (☐) next to the input and output group names to show or hide input and output groups and their corresponding mix matrices. If necessary, scroll through the window by using the mouse wheel or the scroll bar at the right side of the DSP Configurator main workspace.

① Menu Bar on page 13 ② Mic/Line Inputs on page 21 ③ Mix-Points on page 55 ④ Outputs on page 59

Figure 15. DSP Configurator Main Workspace

Menu Bar

File

1 New Ctrl+N 2 Open Ctrl+O 3 Save Ctrl+S 4 Save As 5 Export Single Device 6 Backup 7 Convert Device to... 8 Recent Files 9 Exit

Figure 16. File Menu

1 New — Opens a new configuration file. This option is only available in Emulate mode (see Emulate Mode on page 18). If the current configuration has not been saved, the Save dialog box opens and asks to save the current configuration before a new configuration is opened. Click Yes to save the current configuration. Click No to delete the current configuration and open the new configuration. Click Cancel to return to the current configuration.
② Open — Opens an existing configuration or template file. When selected, the Browse dialog box opens to search for saved configuration or template files. Double-click a configuration or template file to load it.

NOTE: Configuration files have a .EDC file extension and template files have a .EDCT file extension.

③ Save — Saves the current configuration to a configuration file. If this is the first time the configuration is being saved, the Save Configuration As... dialog box opens. Enter a name and save location for the configuration file.

TIP: It is best to create and save configuration files while in Emulate mode.

4 Save As — Saves the current configuration file under a new name and location or as a template file. When selected, the Save Configuration As... dialog box opens.
⑤ Export Single Device — Saves the currently selected device in Device Manager as a configuration file. This function is used to save an individual device when there are multiple devices listed in the Device Manager (see Device Manager on page 82).
⑥ Backup — Recalls and transfers all partial presets of a DMP 128 to the configuration file or template file within DSP Configurator.

NOTE: This is only necessary if a DMP 128 (non-Plus) is included in the configuration file via Device Manager.

7 Convert Device to... — Select a model of DMP 128 Plus to which the current configuration file will be converted. After a conversion target model is selected, the Device Conversion dialog opens. For more information, refer to the DSP Configurator help file by clicking the context sensitive help (?) button in the dialog.
⑧ Recent Files — Lists the five most recently opened configuration files. These files can be selected and loaded into DSP Configurator.

9 Exit — Closes DSP Configurator. If the current configuration has not been saved, the Save dialog box opens and prompts the user to save the current configuration before closing the software. Click Yes to save the file. Click No to exit the application without saving. Click Cancel to return to the main workspace and keep the software running.

Edit

① Cut Ctrl+X ② Copy Ctrl+C ③ Paste Ctrl+V

Figure 17. Edit Menu

① Cut — Removes the configuration of selected elements in the workspace to be pasted to other elements.
② Copy — Copies the configuration of selected elements in the workspace to be pasted to other elements.
③ Paste — Applies the cut or copied configuration of elements to the selected elements in the workspace.

View

① Meter Bridge ② Re-enable All Dialogs ③ Group Controls ④ AT Meters ⑤ Show All Channels

Figure 18. View Menu

① Meter Bridge — Opens a meter bridge to view input and output activity. The meter bridge is a floating window, allowing use of the DSP Configurator workspace while simultaneously monitoring input and output activity.

NOTE: The meter bridge is only available in Live mode with a TCP/IP connection.

② Re-enable All Dialogs — This option re-enables all dialog boxes that no longer appear based on user selection (certain dialog boxes that appear are user-defeatable by selecting a checkbox that reads Do Not Show This Dialog Again).
③ Group Controls — Opens the Group Controls dialog box to access existing group controls and add new groups.
4 AT Meters (AT models only) — Opens a dialog box to select AT devices on the network. Double-click a device to open a meter bridge dialog box that displays AT transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) channel levels for that device. The dialog box is a floating window, allowing use of the main workspace while simultaneously monitoring AT levels.
⑤ Show All Channels — Individual channels can be hidden by user selection. This provides options for the user to select which input and output groups are visible in the main workspace.

Tools

① Presets... ② Configure Groups ③ Configure Digital I/O ④ Configure Players ⑤ Configure ACP Panels ⑥ Configure Macros ⑦ Disconnect from Device F6 ⑧ Device Manager ⑨ Issue RESET Command ⑩ Firmware Loader ⑪ Organize Building Blocks ⑫ Device Settings ⑬ Options ⑭ Network Audio Control ⑮ Expansion Bus

Figure 19. Tools Menu

① Presets — Contains a submenu to mark and clear elements in the main workspace as well as an option to save marked elements to a preset (see Presets on page 67).
② Configure Groups — Opens the Configure Groups dialog box to create, edit, and delete Gain, Mute, Bass, and Treble groups (see Groups on page 69).
③ Configure Digital I/O — Opens the Configure Digital I/O dialog box to assign actions and modes to the digital inputs and outputs (see Digital I/O on page 72).
4 Configure Players — Opens the Configure Players dialog box to upload audio files and assign them to players. Player control options are also found in the dialog box (see Players on page 75).
⑤ Configure ACP Panels — Opens the Configure ACPs dialog box to configure Extron Audio Control Panel interfaces (see Audio Control Panels (ACP) on page 98).
⑥ Configure Macros — Opens the Configure Macros dialog box for creating, editing, and deleting macro functions (see Macros on page 78 for more information).
7 Connect/Disconnect from Device — When in Emulate mode, this reads Connect to Device and opens the Connect to Device dialog box (see Connect to or Disconnect from Device on page 85). When in Live mode, this reads Disconnect from Device and returns the software to Emulate mode.
⑧ Device Manager — Opens the Device Manager dialog box (see Device Manager on page 82).
⑨ Issue RESET Command — Clears the DMP 128 Plus of all processors and other configuration settings. This command does not reset general settings such as IP address.
10 Firmware Loader — Opens the Firmware Loader application, if it is installed (see Firmware Loader on page 85). Visit www.extron.com to download the software.
11 Organize Building Blocks – Opens the Organize Building Blocks dialog box (see Organize Building Blocks on page 88).

12 Device Settings — Opens the Device Settings dialog box to edit date and time, IP address, DHCP status, and other settings (see Device Settings on page 90).
13 Options – Opens the Options dialog box to configure DSP Configurator appearance, default settings, DSP value defaults, and so on (see Options on page 93).
14 Network Audio Control — Opens the Dante Controller application by Audinate for routing audio over a Dante network (see Dante Controller on page 107).
15 Expansion Bus – Contains a submenu to assign a DMP 128 Plus as a Primary or Secondary unit. On DMP 128 Plus AT models, the submenu can assign the expansion ports to AT channels 33-48 (see Expansion Bus on page 94).

Window

① Cascade ② Close All Windows ③ Input Gain (Input #3) Input #3 - Filter Input #3 - AEC Input #3 - AGC Input #3 - Delay

Figure 20. Window Menu

① Cascade — Organizes windows by cascading them in the same order they were opened.
② Close All Windows — Closes all open windows, leaving only the main workspace visible. When all windows are closed, changes to parameters in the open windows are saved before the window is closed.
③ List of Open Windows — Below the dividing line is a list of all open windows. Select a window from the list to bring it into focus and to the forefront of the workspace. Windows appear in the order they were opened.

Help

① Contents F1 ② Search ③ About...

Figure 21. Help Menu

① Contents — Opens the DSP Configurator Help file where detailed information about DSP Configurator can be found.
② Search — Opens the DSP Configurator Help file with the Search field in focus.
③ About — Opens a window displaying software version number, copyright information, and part number for the installed copy of DSP Configurator. Click the Details button for a list of advanced details, such as build number.

Macros Drop-Down

The Run Macro drop-down list is available when connected to the DMP 128 Plus in Live mode. The drop-down list is unavailable in Emulate mode.

The Run Macro drop-down list allows the user to view and run all macros that have been pushed to the device. The list of macros updates dynamically when a new macro is created. Macros created in DSP Configurator that have not been pushed to the device appear in the list with an asterisk to the right of the macro name. Only macros that have been pushed to the device can be run from the Run Macro drop-down list (see Macros on page 78 for information on configuring macros).

Figure 22. Macros Drop-Down Menu

Presets Drop-Down

The Presets drop-down menu allows the user to view and apply presets saved in the current configuration file or on a device connected in Live mode. Presets with an asterisk next to them are on the DMP 128 Plus, but not in the current configuration file. Run a preset to load it into the configuration file. Alternatively, perform a backup to run all presets and load them into the current configuration file (see File on page 13).

Presets: Current Emulation Current Emulation 1- Conf Room 1 2- Main Hall 3- Front Lobby 4- Classroom 1

Figure 23. Presets Drop-Down Menu

After selecting a preset from the list, choose one of the following actions from the DSP Configurator status panel:

Recall — Recalls the selected preset and applies settings to the main workspace.

Cancel — Cancels the preset recall and returns to the main workspace with the current emulation or state intact.

Delete — Deletes the selected preset from the configuration.

Presets: 1-Conf Room 1 Recall Cancel Delete

Figure 24. Preset and Action Selection

DSP Configurator Status Panel

This panel displays the current status of DSP Configurator and shows when data is being pushed to or pulled from the device. When the software is ready to perform actions, the panel reads Ready.

Figure 25. DSP Configurator Status Panel

Live and Emulate Panel

The Live and Emulate buttons allow users to switch between Live and Emulate mode and displays transmit activity (Tx) and receive activity (Rx) when in Live mode.

Figure 26. Mode Panel

Emulate Mode

While in Emulate mode, DSP Configurator is functioning in an "offline" state. Changes made to the configuration file are not applied to a DMP 128 Plus.

In Emulate mode, the user can create and configure the software as though a device was connected, except for any actions that require direct connection to the device or information that is stored only on the device. Once configuration is complete, the user can switch to Live mode and apply the configuration to the device or save the configuration file to be loaded onto one or multiple devices at a later time.

Creating configuration files in Emulate mode saves time by not requiring a device to be connected or present in order for the bulk of DSP configuration to be completed.

NOTE: Not all menu options or actions are available in Emulate mode.

Live Mode

Enter Live mode to connect to a DMP 128 Plus and push or pull configurations between the device and host PC. In Live mode, changes made in DSP Configurator are directly applied to the DMP 128 Plus. Additionally, presets and macros can be created and stored on the device.

When entering Live mode, the user is prompted with the Connect to device dialog box.

Connect to a DMP 128 Plus in Live Mode

1. Click the Live button in the menu bar of DSP Configurator (see figure 27, ①). Alternatively, select Tools > Connect to Device or press on the keyboard. The Connect to device dialog box opens.

Live Emulate Tx: Rx

Figure 27. Live Button

1. Connect to the DMP 128 Plus.

a. To connect via TCP/IP (recommended):

Click the TCP/IP tab in the dialog box. Enter the IP address of the device in the Hostname or IP Address field. If necessary, enter the device password in the Password field (see figure 28 a on the next page).

b. To connect via USB:

Click the USB tab in the dialog box. Select the device from the USB Devices drop-down menu (see figure 28 b on the next page).

c. To connect via RS-232:

Click the RS-232 tab in the dialog box. Select the com port the device is connected to on the host PC from the Com Port drop-down (see figure 28 © on the next page).

Connect to device... a Please select the appropriate communication settings and click OK to continue. TCP/IP USB RS-232 Port Configuration Hostname or IP Address: Telnet port: 23 Password: **** Set Defaults OK Cancel Connect to device... b Please select the appropriate communication settings and click OK to continue. TCP/IP USB RS-232 Port Configuration USB Devices Extron USB Device Refresh List Connect to device... c Please select the appropriate communication settings and click OK to continue. TCP/IP USB RS-232 Port Configuration Com Port: COM1 Baud Rate: 38400 Party Bit: None Data Bit: 0 Stop Bit: 1 Set Defaults OK Cancel

Figure 28. Connect to device... TCP/IP, USB, and RS-232 Dialog Box

1. When a connection with a device is established, the Synchronize with Device dialog box opens.

Synchronize with Device You have elected to change from Emulate mode to Live mode. The data in this configuration must be synchronized with the data in the device. Please select an option below to continue: • Pull data from the device and update this configuration. • Push the data from this configuration to device, overwriting any data currently in it. Advanced... OK Cancel

Figure 29. Synchronize with Device Dialog Box

a. Pull — Pulls the configuration file, presets, macros, and ACP configurations from the device and displays it in the DSP Configurator main workspace.
b. Push — Pushes the configuration file, presets, macros, and ACP configurations open in DSP Configurator to the connected DMP 128 Plus. This will overwrite any configuration currently on the device.

Click Advanced... to open the Advanced Push Options dialog box (see figure 30).

NOTE: If only pushing selected presets, the preset selection dialog box opens after clicking OK on the Advanced Push Options dialog box.

Advanced Push Options Please select an option: DEFAULT: Push entire configuration, including all processors, channel names, and presets, overwriting everything currently stored in the device. CUSTOM: You will be disconnected after the selected items are pushed ✓ Push Configuration ✓ Push Presets NOTE: This option will result in the device cycling through each preset pushed and should not be done during any live operations. ○ All ● Selected OK Cancel

Figure 30. Advanced Push Options Dialog Box

If only pushing selected presets, mark them from the dialog box shown in figure 31 below.

DSP Configurator Select the presets you would like to push to the device. Presets in the Configuration 1. ConfRin1 2. Auditorium 3. Lecture Hall 4. Not Available 5. Not Available 6. Not Available 7. Not Available 8. Not Available 9. Not Available 10. Not Available 11. Not Available 12. Not Available 13. Not Available Presets in the Device 1. [unassigned] 2. [unassigned] 3. [unassigned] 4. [unassigned] 5. [unassigned] 6. [unassigned] 7. [unassigned] 8. [unassigned] 9. [unassigned] 10. [unassigned] 11. [unassigned] 12. [unassigned] 13. [unassigned] OK Cancel

Figure 31. Preset Selection Dialog Box

1. Once a push or pull is completed, the current state of the connected DMP 128 Plus is displayed in the DSP Configurator status panel and the device is ready for further configuration.

Exit Live Mode and Enter Emulate Mode

1. Click the Emulate button in the DSP Configurator menu bar (see figure 32, ①). Alternatively, select Tools > Disconnect from Device or press on the keyboard.

Live Emulate Tx Rx

Figure 32. Emulate Button

1. Click OK to confirm.

Confirm Are you sure you want to disconnect? OK Cancel

Figure 33. Confirm Disconnect

DSP Configurator Inputs

All available inputs are listed vertically along the left side of the DSP Configurator main workspace. The input groups can be expanded or collapsed by clicking the expand) or (collapse) buttons next to the input group names.

There are four types of inputs available:

- Mic/Line Inputs

• Virtual Returns on page 48

• Aux Inputs on page 43

• Expansion and AT Inputs on page 53

Mic/Line Inputs

The twelve mic/line input channels on the DMP 128 Plus are shown in DSP Configurator under the Inputs panel (see figure 34).

graph TD
    A["Input 1"] --> B["RAG GAIN"]
    C["Input 2"] --> D["RAG GAIN"]
    E["Input 3"] --> F["RAG GAIN"]
    G["Input 4"] --> H["RAG GAIN"]
    I["Input 5"] --> J["RAG GAIN"]
    K["Input 6"] --> L["RAG GAIN"]
    M["Input 7"] --> N["RAG GAIN"]
    O["Input 8"] --> P["RAG GAIN"]
    Q["Input 9"] --> R["RAG GAIN"]
    S["Input 10"] --> T["RAG GAIN"]
    U["Input 11"] --> V["RAG GAIN"]
    W["Input 12"] --> X["RAG GAIN"]

    B --> Y["7.5T"]
    D --> Z["7.5C"]
    D --> AA["7.5A"]
    D --> AB["7.5Y"]
    D --> AC["9.5T"]
    D --> AD["9.5X"]
    E --> AE["7.5T"]
    F --> AF["7.5C"]
    F --> AG["7.5A"]
    F --> AH["7.5Y"]
    F --> AI["9.5T"]
    F --> AJ["9.5X"]
    G --> AK["7.5T"]
    H --> AL["7.5C"]
    H --> AM["7.5A"]
    H --> AN["7.5Y"]
    H --> AO["9.5T"]
    H --> AP["9.5X"]
    I --> AQ["7.5T"]
    J --> AR["7.5C"]
    J --> AS["7.5A"]
    J --> AT["7.5Y"]
    J --> AU["9.5T"]
    J --> AV["9.5X"]
    K --> AW["7.5T"]
    L --> AX["7.5C"]
    L --> AY["7.5A"]
    L --> AZ["7.5Y"]
    L --> BA["9.5T"]
    L --> BB["9.5X"]
    M --> BC["7.5T"]
    N --> BD["7.5C"]
    N --> BE["7.5A"]
    N --> BF["7.5Y"]
    N --> BG["9.5T"]
    N --> BH["9.5X"]
    O --> BI["7.5T"]
    P --> BJ["7.5C"]
    P --> BK["7.5A"]
    P --> BL["7.5Y"]
    P --> BM["9.5T"]
    P --> BN["9.5X"]
    Q --> BO["7.5T"]
    R --> BP["7.5C"]
    R --> BQ["7.5A"]
    R --> BR["7.5Y"]
    R --> BS["9.5T"]
    R --> BT["9.5X"]
    S --> BU["7.5T"]
    T --> BV["7.5C"]
    T --> BW["7.5A"]
    T --> BX["7.5Y"]
    T --> BY["9.5T"]
    T --> BZ["9.5X"]

Figure 34. Inputs Panel

Inputs 1 - 8 offer AEC (Acoustic Echo Cancellation) DSP capability (C models only) and phantom power. Inputs 9 - 12 do not have AEC or phantom power. All inputs can receive mic level or line level signal, but inputs 1 - 8 are recommended for receiving microphone signal and inputs 9 - 12 are recommended for receiving line level signal.

Naming an Input Channel

1. Click the input name field.

Figure 35. Input Name Field

1. Highlight or delete the text and enter a new name.

Figure 36. New Input Name

1. Press or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new input name. Press key to navigate to and highlight the next name field.

Figure 37. Renamed Input

NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit an input name.

Input Building Blocks

Extron building blocks are a quick configuration tool that can significantly reduce configuration time. An input building block is a collection of processor and gain settings for an input processing chain. These building blocks have been designed by Extron based on extensive use and testing with each intended application or specific device.

graph LR
    A["Input #1"] --> B["ANG"]
    B --> C["FILT"]
    C --> D["REC"]
    D --> E["DYN"]
    E --> F["DYN"]
    F --> G["OLY"]
    G --> H["DUCK"]
    H --> I["AM"]
    I --> J["GAIN"]

Figure 38. Accessing Input Building Blocks

Click the input number (see figure 38 above) to open the Building Blocks dialog box.

Build Blocks Table Mic -Boundary Table Mic - Gooseneck Lectem Mic - Gooseneck Ceiling Mic Handheld Mic Handheld Mic - 6 in Handheld Mic - 1 in Wireless Mic Wireless Mic Rx (+4 dBu) Wireless Mic Rx (-10 dBV) Wireless Mic Rx (mic level) Line Level

① Building Block Folders

④ Delete a Building Block Button

② General Building Blocks

⑤ New Folder Button

③ Add a Building Block Button

⑥ Building Blocks Help Button

Figure 39. Input Building Blocks Dialog Box

1 Building Block Folders — These folders group input types together, such as table or handheld mics, for easy access (see figure 40 below).

Building Blocks Table Mc -Boundary Clock Audio C003-RF Clock Audio C004-RF Clock Audio C008E-RF Clock Audio C012E-RF Clock Audio C015E-RF Clock Audio C016E-RF Clock Audio CS-RF Shure MX395/C Shure MX395/BI Shure MX396 Shure MX391/C Shure MX391/S

Figure 40. Mic Building Block Folder Contents

2 General Building Blocks — These building blocks provide quick setup for input sources. General building blocks provide a useful starting point for devices in the same product category as the name of the building block, such as handheld microphones, line level sources, and so on.
3 Add a Building Block Button — Creates a custom building block from the current gain and processor settings on the selected channel. When this button is clicked, the Add a Building Block dialog box opens. Name the new custom building block and choose a folder to save the block to, or create a new folder (see figure 41 below).

Add a Building Block Name: Custom Building Block Create In: Building Blocks New Folder Add Cancel

Figure 41. Add a Building Block Dialog Box

4 Delete a Building Block Button — Deletes the currently selected building block or building block folder. If default building blocks are deleted, they can be restored from the Organize Building Blocks dialog box. Custom building blocks can be saved to a file from the same dialog box (see Organize Building Blocks on page 88).
5 New Folder Button —Creates a new folder or sub-folder in the Building Blocks dialog box.
6 Building Blocks Help Button — Opens the Building Blocks topic of the DSP Configurator Help file. This topic contains more information on the different types of building blocks for inputs and outputs.

Input Processing

The mic/line input processing chain in DSP Configurator is visually represented by a string of blocks (see figure 42 below). Each block contains a specific processor or type of processor. For example, the Input Gain block contains a fader to boost or attenuate incoming signal, the Filter block contains several types of filters, and so on. Inputs 1 - 8 contain the following signal chain:

1. Input Gain Block
2. Input Filter Block
3. Input AEC Block (C Models Only)
4. Input Dynamics Blocks (2)
5. Input Delay Block
6. Input Ducking Block
7. Input Automix Block
8. Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block

graph LR
    A["Input #1"] --> B["ANG GAIN"]
    B --> C["FILT"]
    C --> D["REC"]
    D --> E["DYN"]
    E --> F["DYN"]
    F --> G["DLY"]
    G --> H["DUCK"]
    H --> I["AM"]
    I --> J["GAIN"]

Figure 42. Input Processing Chain for Inputs 1 - 8

Inputs 9 - 12 do not contain AEC processing or phantom power. All other processors are available and function the same as inputs 1 - 8.

graph LR
    A["9 Input #9"] --> B["ANG"]
    B --> C["FILT"]
    C --> D["DYN"]
    D --> E["DYN"]
    E --> F["ML"]
    F --> G["GAIN"]

Figure 43. Input Processing Chain for Inputs 9 - 12

Input Gain Block

Double-click the Input Gain block to open the Input Gain dialog box.

Figure 44. Input Gain Block

The Input Gain dialog box provides controls to configure the input gain stage of the input processing path.

Input Gain Input 1 80 -18 0.0 dB + Polarity Mute Phantom Power Source: Analog OK Cancel

① Input Name
② Gain Fader
③ dBFS Meter
④ dBFS Numeric Readout
⑤ Input Gain Text Field
⑥ Polarity Toggle Button

⑦ Mute Button
⑧ Phantom Power Check Box
⑨ Source Drop-Down Menu
10 OK Button
⑪ Cancel Button
⑫ Input Gain Help Button

Figure 45. Input Gain Dialog Box

① Input Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined input name.
② Gain Fader — Provides up to 80 dB of gain or 18 dB of attenuation in 1 dB steps. Click the fader once and press the or keys to adjust the fader up or down in 1 dB steps. Press the or keys to adjust the fader up or down in 10 dB steps.
③ dBFS Meter — This meter displays the input signal level in dBFS ranging from -60 dBFS to 0 dBFS. Once the signal reaches or passes -1 dBFS (default) or the clip threshold defined in the Options dialog box (see Options on page 93), the clip box located at the top of the meter lights red.
4 dBFS Numeric Readout — This read-only text box displays the numerical value of the input signal level in dBFS.
⑤ Input Gain Text Field — This text field allows the user to enter a gain or attenuation value in 0.1 dB steps.
⑥ Polarity Toggle Button — Inverts the signal polarity of the selected input. When the button displays the black + symbol on a gray field (☐), the polarity is normal. When the button displays the black - symbol on a yellow field (☐), the polarity is inverted.
⑦ Mute Button — Mutes signal at the input stage, preventing it from going any further in the signal processing chain.
⑧ Phantom Power Check Box — Provides 48 V phantom power to the selected input for use with condenser microphones. Available on inputs 1 through 8 only.
⑨ Source Drop-Down Menu (AT models only) — Selects the input audio source for the channel. Source options are analog (default) or any of the AT inputs. Input gain range changes to +24 dB to -18 dB when using AT inputs.
10 OK Button — Confirms changes and closes the Input Gain dialog box.
11 Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Input Gain dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.
12 Input Gain Help Button — Opens the Mic/Line Input Gain topic in the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in configuring input gain.

Input Filter Block

Double-click the Filter block to open the filter drop-down menu. Select one of the eleven available filters to insert into the block.

High Pass Filter Low Pass Filter Bass & Treble Filters Parametric EQ Notch EQ High Pass Bessel Low Pass Bessel High Pass Linkwitz-Riley Low Pass Linkwitz-Riley Loudness

Figure 46. Filter Block and Drop-Down Menu

Alternatively, right-click the Filter block and select Insert, then select a filter to insert it into the block.

Insert... Mark Row Unmark Row Cut Ctrl+X Copy Ctrl+C Paste Ctrl+V Delete Del Whats wrong? High Pass Filter Low Pass Filter Bass & Treble Filters Parametric EQ Notch EQ High Pass Bessel Low Pass Bessel High Pass Linkwitz-Riley Low Pass Linkwitz-Riley Loudness

Figure 47. Insert Filter Drop-Down Menu

Once an initial filter is selected, the Filter block changes to display the type of filter applied. For example, if High Pass Filter is selected, the Filter block would display HIGH PASS instead of FILT. If multiple filters are applied, the Filter block displays FILT over a dark green field.

Figure 48. Filter Block Icons

Once a filter is applied to the Filter block, double-click the block to open the Filter dialog box.

① Filter Channel Name

⑤ OK Button

② Filter Graph

⑥ Cancel Button

③ Filter List

⑦ Filters Help Button

④ Set Defaults Button

Figure 49. Filter Dialog Box

① Filter Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined input name.
② Filter Graph — Graphically displays the applied filter curve and provides handles for adjusting filter parameters. Numbers along the top of the graph represent the filter curve of the corresponding slot in the filter list below the graph. The number appears over the center frequency of the filter.

If a filter is active (unbypassed), it appears as a solid red curve. If a filter is bypassed, it appears as a broken orange curve (such as the bass filter in slot 2).

NOTE: All filters are bypassed by default.

③ Filter List — Provides filter drop-down menus for all 5 available filter slots. Frequency, Slope, Boost/Cut, Q, and Bypass controls are also available in this list.

Available filters include:

• High Pass Butterworth • High Pass Linkwitz-Reily
- Low Pass Butterworth - Low Pass Linkwitz-Reily
- Bass • High Pass Bessel
- Treble - Low Pass Bessel
- Parametric - Loudness
- Notch

NOTE: See the DSP Configurator Help file for more information on each of the filters. Click the Filters Help button to open the help file topic discussing filters.

4 Set Defaults Button — Resets all filter parameters of all filters in the filter list to their default values.

To reset a single filter to default parameters, right-click the filter number on the left side of the Filter dialog box, and select Set to Default (see figure 50 below).

Copy Ctrl+C Paste Ctrl+V Delete Del Set to Default

Figure 50. Set Single Filter Parameters to Default

5 OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Filter dialog box.

⑥ Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Filter dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.

7 Filters Help Button — Opens the About Filters topic in the DSP Configurator Help file. This help file topic discusses each filter type in greater detail.

Input AEC Block (C Models Only)

About AEC

Echo occurs when audio from a talker in the far end is received and amplified into the near end listener's room, with that sound then being picked up by microphones in the near end acoustic space and sent back to the far end. The amount of signal sent back to the far end talker can be substantial, and with the added transmission delay, the result is an echo effect that can seriously compromise communication in a teleconference or videoconference.

The Extron Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) processor removes the potential echo signal at the near end mic channel by comparing it to the received signal from the far end, designated as the “reference,” and then creating an adaptive filter to cancel the potential echo before it is sent back to the far end.

Successful operation of the AEC processing block is mainly a function of proper gain structure and selection of an AEC reference. This section provides an overview of those two elements.

Proper gain structure involves the relationship between the signal at the selected reference and the signal at the mic input, within the context of proper levels for the reference and mic inputs independently. The mic input gain setting will naturally be optimized for the voice level of the talker in that room. Therefore, the amount of signal from the far end picked up by the mic is dependent on how much far end signal is being amplified in the near end room and the distance from the mic to the speakers.

AEC Operation

Double-click the AEC block to open the AEC drop-down menu. Select AEC to insert the AEC processor.

Figure 51. AEC Block and Drop-Down Menu

NOTE: Insert the AEC processor on the input with the near end microphone connected.

Once the AEC processor is inserted, double-click the AEC block to open the AEC dialog box.

Input #1 - AEC Activity Far: Near: Update: 2 ERL 3 ERLE 4 TER Level in dB Level in dB Level in dB Target Range -20 -40 -40 -10 -30 -20 -0 -20 -10 -10 -10 -10 -20 -20 -20 -25.6 0.0 -25.6 Reference: None 6 Noise Cancellation ✓ Cancel Noise by: 15.0 dB 7 Bypass OK Cancel 10

① Activity Panel
② ERL Meter
③ ERLE Meter
4 TER Meter
⑤ Reference Selection Drop-Down
⑥ Noise Cancellation Panel

Figure 52. AEC Dialog Box

⑦ Bypass Button
8 OK Button
⑨ Cancel Button
10 Show/Hide Advanced Options Button
11 AEC Help Button

Activity Panel — Far lights when signal activity is detected from the far end. Near lights when activity is detected from the near end. Update lights when AEC is updating, converging, or reconverging.
② ERL Meter — ERL (echo return loss) is the ratio of the far end signal at the reference input to the far end signal received at the mic input and is expressed in dB. This meter should read between -10 dB and +10 dB for proper AEC operation.
3 ERLE Meter — ERLE (echo return loss enhancement) is the amount of potential echo signal that the AEC algorithm is cancelling (not including NLP processing) and is expressed in dB.
4 TER Meter — TER (total echo reduction) is the sum of ERL and ERLE and represents the total amount of echo reduction and is expressed in dB.
5 Reference Selection Drop-Down Menu — Provides all mic/line inputs, Aux inputs, virtual returns, line outputs, and Expansion outputs for reference selection. When a channel is selected as the reference, the AEC processor compares the reference channel signal to the current input channel.
6 Noise Cancellation Panel — Provides a checkbox to engage the noise canceller (engaged by default) and text field to enter the amount of noise reduction in dB.
⑦ Bypass Button — Bypasses the AEC processor. When the button is red, bypass is enabled.
8 OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the AEC dialog box.
9 Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the AEC dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.
10 Show/Hide Advanced Options Button — Shows or hides the advanced configuration options for the AEC processor (see AEC Advanced Options on the next page).
11 AEC Help Button — Opens the Acoustic Echo Cancellation topic of the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in operating AEC processor.

AEC Advanced Options

The AEC dialog box provides advanced NLP (non-linear processing) options for fine tuning echo cancellation. These options are hidden by default. Click the Show/Hide Advanced Options button to access them (see figure 52, 10 on page 29).

Enable NLP NLP Presets: Soft Normal Aggressive Max NLP Reduction: 50.0 dB Attack Time: 6.0 ms Release Time: 150.0 ms Double Talk Echo Reduction: 15.0 dB Comfort Noise: 0.0 dB

① Enable NLP Checkbox
② NLP Presets
③ NLP Reduction Parameters
④ Double Talk Echo Reduction
⑤ Comfort Noise

Figure 53. AEC Advanced Options

1 Enable NLP Checkbox — Checked by default, NLP (non-linear processing) is required to completely remove echo.
② NLP Presets — Offers three preset options for NLP parameters.

- Soft — Applies soft preset values to the NLP reduction parameters for light echo cancellation.

- Normal (default) — Applies normal preset values to the NLP reduction parameters for the widest array of echo cancellation needs.

- Aggressive — Applies aggressive preset values to the NLP reduction parameters for aggressive echo cancellation.

③ NLP Reduction Parameters — Provides text boxes for Max NLP Reduction, Attack Time, and Release Time to customize NLP reduction parameters.
4 Double Talk Echo Reduction — Provides a text box to enter a reduction value (in dB) when double talk occurs. Double talk is when near end talkers and far end talkers are speaking simultaneously while AEC is engaged.
⑤ Comfort Noise Text Box — Provides an ambient noise signal to prevent states of complete silence that may be perceived as a failed or dropped connection. 0 dB is the default.

Input Dynamics Blocks

Double-click the Dynamics block to open the dynamics drop-down menu.

DYN AGC Compressor Limiter Noise Gate

Figure 54. Dynamics Block and Drop-Down Menu

From the Dynamics drop-down menu, four types of dynamics processors are available. Select a dynamics processor type to insert it into the Dynamics block.

There are two Dynamics blocks available per mic/line input channel. Each block can be configured with any of the processor types.

The four types of dynamics processors available are:

• AGC (Automatic Gain Control) on the next page
• Compressor on page 34
- Limiter on page 35
- Noise Gate on page 36

Once a dynamics processor is inserted, double-click the dynamics block icon to open the corresponding dialog box.

Figure 55. AGC, Compressor, Limiter, and Noise Gate Icons

If a dynamics processor has been inserted and needs to be changed to a different dynamics processor, right-click the dynamics block, hover over Insert, and select a new processor to insert it (see figure 56 below).

Insert... Mark Row Unmark Row Cut Ctrl+X Copy Ctrl+C Paste Ctrl+V Delete Del Whats wrong? AGC Compressor Limiter Noise Gate GRIN GRIN GRIN

Figure 56. Changing Dynamics Processors

AGC (Automatic Gain Control)

Input #1 - AGC Input Threshold 40.0 dB Maximum Gain 12.0 dB Target 10.0 dB Window 12.0 dB Attack Time: 500.0 ms Hold Time: 0.0 ms Locked Trim 1500.0 ms OK Cancel Set Defaults

① Dynamics Channel Name

② AGC Graph

③ AGC Parameters List and Control

④ Bypass Button

⑤ Set Defaults Button

⑥ OK Button

⑦ Cancel Button

⑧ Dynamics Help Button

Figure 57. AGC Dialog Box

① Dynamics Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined input name.

② AGC Graph — Graphically displays AGC parameter settings. Parameters can also be adjusted using this graph. Click and drag the yellow lines to adjust the Window parameter. Click and drag the bottom dot to adjust the Threshold parameter. Click and drag the middle dot to adjust the Maximum Gain parameter. Click and drag the top dot to adjust the Target parameter.

③ AGC Parameters List and Control — Provides text boxes to adjust all AGC parameters. Attack Time, Hold Time, and Release Time also have sliders that adjust their respective parameters. Click a slider once and use the and keys to adjust the respective parameter in 1 ms steps.

4 Bypass Button — Bypasses the AGC processor. When the button is red, bypass is enabled.

⑤ Set Defaults Button — Resets all AGC parameters to their default values. To view individual parameter default values, see the DSP Configurator Help file by clicking the Dynamics Help button (⑧) and opening the About Dynamics topic.

⑥ OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the AGC dialog box.

⑦ Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the AGC dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.

⑧ Dynamics Help Button — Opens the Dynamics Operation topic of the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in operating dynamics processors.

Compressor

Input #1 - Compressor Output Input Threshold: -30.0 dB Rate: 2.0 1 Attack Time: 5.0 ms Hold Time: 100.0 ms Release Time: 100.0 ms Name: Set Defaults OK Cancel

① Compressor Channel Name
② Compressor Graph
③ Compressor Parameter List and Control
④ Bypass Button
⑤ Set Defaults Button
⑥ OK Button
⑦ Cancel Button
⑧ Dynamics Help Button

Figure 58. Compressor Dialog Box

① Compressor Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined input name.
② Compressor Graph — Graphically displays compressor parameter settings. Parameters can also be adjusted using this graph. Click and drag the dot within the green area of the graph to adjust the compressor Threshold. Click and drag the dot outside the green box to adjust the compressor Ratio.
③ Compressor Parameter List and Control — Lists all configurable parameters for the compressor. Text fields are available to adjust Threshold, Ratio, Attack Time, Hold Time, and Release Time. Click and drag sliders to adjust Attack Time, Hold Time, and Release Time. Click a slider once and use the and keys to adjust the respective parameter in 1 ms steps. Select the Soft Knee checkbox to provide a more natural implementation of compression when the signal reaches the threshold.
④ Bypass Button — Bypasses the compressor. When the button is red, bypass is enabled.
⑤ Set Defaults Button — Resets all compressor parameters to their default values. To view individual parameter default values, see the DSP Configurator Help file by clicking the Dynamics Help button (⑧) to open the About Dynamics topic.
⑥ OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Compressor dialog box.
⑦ Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Compressor dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.
⑧ Dynamics Help Button — Opens the Dynamics Operation topic of the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in operating dynamics processors.

Limiter

Input #1 - Limiter Output Input Threshold 10.0 dB Soft Knee Attack Time: 2.0 ms Hold Time: 50.0 ms Release Time: 50.0 ms Set Defaults OK Cancel

① Limiter Channel Name
② Limiter Graph
③ Limiter Parameter List and Control
④ Bypass Button
⑤ Set Defaults Button
⑥ OK Button
⑦ Cancel Button
⑧ Dynamics Help Button

Figure 59. Limiter Dialog Box

1 Limiter Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined input name.
② Limiter Graph — Graphically displays limiter parameter settings. Parameters can also be adjusted using this graph. Click and drag the dot on the graph to adjust the limiter Threshold.
③ Limiter Parameter List and Control — Lists all configurable parameters for the limiter. Text fields are available to adjust Threshold, Attack Time, Hold Time, and Release Time. Click and drag sliders to adjust Attack Time, Hold Time, and Release Time. Click a slider once and use the and keys to adjust the respective parameter in 1 ms steps. Select the Soft Knee checkbox to provide a more gradual implementation of limiting when the signal reaches the threshold.
4 Bypass Button — Bypasses the limiter. When the button is red, bypass is enabled.
⑤ Set Defaults Button — Resets all limiter parameters to their default values. To view individual parameter default values, see the DSP Configurator Help file by clicking the Dynamics Help button (⑧) and navigate to the About Dynamics topic.
⑥ OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Limiter dialog box.
⑦ Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Limiter dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.
8 Dynamics Help Button — Opens the Dynamics Operation topic of the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in operating dynamics processors.

Noise Gate

Input #1 - Noise Gate Output Input Threshold: -65.0 dB Max Attenuation: 25.0 dB Ratio: 20.0 1 Attack Time: 1.0 ms Hold Time: 300.0 ms Release Time: 1000.0 ms OK Cancel

① Noise Gate Channel Name
② Noise Gate Graph
③ Noise Gate Parameter List and Control
④ Bypass Button
⑤ Set Defaults Button
⑥ OK Button
⑦ Cancel Button
⑧ Dynamics Help Button

Figure 60. Noise Gate Dialog Box

① Noise Gate Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined input name.

② Noise Gate Graph — Graphically displays noise gate parameter settings. Parameters can also be adjusted using this graph. Click and drag the upper dot to adjust Ratio. Click and drag the middle dot to adjust Threshold. Click and drag the bottom dot (out of view at default settings) to adjust Max Attenuation.

③ Noise Gate Parameter List and Control — Lists all configurable parameters for the noise gate. Text fields are available to adjust Threshold, Max Attenuation, Ratio, Attack Time, Hold Time, and Release Time. Click and drag the sliders to adjust Attack Time, Hold Time, and Release Time. Click a slider once and use the and keys to adjust the respective parameter in 1 ms steps.

4 Bypass Button — Bypasses the noise gate. When the button is red, bypass is enabled.

⑤ Set Defaults Button — Resets all noise gate parameters to their default values. To view individual parameter default settings, see the DSP Configurator Help file by clicking the Dynamics Help button (⑧) and navigate to the About Dynamics topic.

⑥ OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Noise Gate dialog box.

⑦ Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Noise Gate dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.

⑧ Dynamics Help Button — Opens the Dynamics Operation topic of the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in operating dynamics processors.

Input Delay Block

Double-click the Delay block to open the delay drop-down. Click Delay to insert the delay processor into the block.

Figure 61. Delay Block and Drop-Down Menu

Once a delay processor is inserted into the Delay block, double-click the block to open the Delay dialog box.

input #1 - Delay 9600 samples Units Samples (4800 samples) Milliseconds (100.000 ms) Feet (112.887 feet) Meters (34.417 meters) Temperature 70.0 degrees Fahrenheit Celsius OK Cancel Set Defaults Return

① Delay Channel Name
② Units of Measurement
③ Delay Fader and Text Box
④ Temperature Panel
⑤ OK Button
⑥ Set Defaults Button
⑦ Cancel Button
⑧ Bypass Button
⑨ Delay Help Button

Figure 62. Delay Dialog Box

① Delay Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined input name.
② Units of Measurement — Radio buttons change the unit of measurement used by the delay fader and text box. Samples, Milliseconds, Feet, and Meters are available units of measurement. Values are converted when the unit of measurement is changed. Changing the unit of measurement does not alter the amount of delay applied to the signal.
③ Delay Fader and Text Box — Adjusts the amount of delay applied to the signal. Click and drag the fader up or down to increase or decrease the amount of delay. Click the fader once and use the or to adjust delay in 1 sample steps (or the 1 sample equivalent in milliseconds, feet, or meters). Use the text box below the fader to input a delay value.
4 Temperature Panel — Becomes available when using delay in feet or meters. Compensates delay for ambient temperature in the acoustic space. Temperature is not available when using samples or milliseconds as the unit of measurement.
⑤ OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Delay dialog box.
⑥ Set Defaults Button — Resets the delay to 4800 samples.
⑦ Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Delay dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.
⑧ Bypass Button — Bypasses the delay. When the button is red, bypass is enabled.
⑨ Delay Help Button — Opens the Delay Operation topic of the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in understanding operating the delay processor.

Input Ducking Block

The duck block contains a ducking processor as well as an adaptive gain processor.

• Ducker (see the next page) — Decreases levels on specified channels when signal is present above a set threshold on the duck source (trigger).
• Adaptive Gain (see page 40) — Increases levels on specified channels when signal is present above a set threshold on the adaptive gain source channel (trigger).

Double-click the Duck block to open the drop-down menu where the Ducker and Adaptive Gain processors can be selected.

DUCK Ducker Adaptive Gain

Figure 63. Duck Block and Drop-Down Menu

Select Ducker to insert a ducking processor into the duck block. Select Adaptive Gain to insert an adaptive gain processor into the duck block. Depending on the processor selected, the duck block displays DUCK for a ducker or AG for adaptive gain.

Figure 64. Ducking Block Icons

If a ducking processor has been inserted and needs to be changed to an adaptive gain processor, or vice versa, right-click the block and hover over Insert to insert a different processor (see figure 65 below).

Insert... Mark Row Unmark Row Cut Ctrl+X Copy Ctrl+C Paste Ctrl+V Delete Del Whats wrong? Ducker Adaptive Gain

Figure 65. Changing Ducking Processor

Ducker

After inserting a ducker processor, double-click the Duck icon to open the Ducker Configuration dialog box.

Ducker Configuration Mic 1 Enable Source Mic/Line Duck by (dB) Mic 2 20.0 Mic 3 20.0 Mic 4 20.0 PC Audio 20.0 PC Audio 20.0 DVD 20.0 DVD 20.0 iPod 20.0 Input #10 20.0 Settings Threshold -20 dB Attack Time 1 ms Hold Time 1000 ms Release 1000 ms Punchy Mic 2 PC Audio PC Audio DVD DVD iPod PC Audio PC Audio DVD DVD iPod PC 4 Mic 2 Mic 3 Mic 4 (AC) PC Audio PC Audio DVD DVD iPod Input #10 Input #11 Input #12 Aux In #1 Aux In #2 Aux In #3

① Duck Source Configuration
② Duck Parameter Settings
③ Duck Priority Tree
④ Ducking Operation Help Button

Figure 66. Ducker Configuration Dialog Box

1 Duck Source Configuration — The Enable Source Mic/Line checkbox is checked when a ducker is inserted (default). In the Duck column, check the inputs that will be ducked. In the by (dB) column, enter the amount of ducking that will occur on each channel selected in the Duck column. When the threshold is exceeded on the duck source, ducking occurs on the selected channels.
② Duck Parameter Settings — Contains controls for setting Threshold, Attack Time, Hold Time, and Release. Click the Ducking Operation Help button (4) to open the Ducking Operation topic in the DSP Configurator Help fie.
3 Duck Priority Tree — Displays the ducking priority for all Input and Aux In channels. Select another input to populate the Ducker Configuration dialog with the ducker information for that channel. Channels with an adaptive gain processor are appended with an (AG) (see Mic 4 in figure 66 above). Channels with adaptive gain processors cannot be selected from this dialog box.
4 Ducking Operation Help Button — Opens the Ducking Operation topic of the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in ducker configuration.

Adaptive Gain

After inserting an adaptive gain processor, double-click the AG icon to open the Adaptive Gain dialog box.

Adaptive Gain Input #1 Add Gain To: max gain (dB) Mix Status: Input #2 20.0 Input #3 20.0 Input #4 20.0 Input #5 20.0 Input #6 20.0 Input #7 20.0 Input #8 20.0 Input #9 20.0 Input #10 20.0 Input #11 20.0 Settings: Threshold -30 d8 Attack Time 1 ms Hold Time 1000 ms Release 1000 ms

① Adaptive Gain Source Configuration
② Adaptive Gain Parameter Settings
③ Adaptive Gain Operation Help Button

Figure 67. Adaptive Gain Dialog Box

1 Adaptive Gain Source Configuration — In the Add Gain To column, check the inputs that will have gain added by the adaptive gain processor. In the Max Gain (dB) column, enter the maximum amount of gain that will be applied to each channel selected in the Add Gain To column. When a box is checked, gain is applied to that channel when signal exceeds the threshold on the adaptive gain trigger channel.

NOTE: For every 1 dB of signal beyond the level set in the Threshold field, 1 dB of gain will be added to the channels selected in the Add Gain To column. This occurs until the maximum gain set in the Max Gain (dB) field has been applied.

② Adaptive Gain Parameter Settings — Contains controls for Threshold, Attack Time, Hold Time, and Release Time.
③ Adaptive Gain Operation Help Button — Opens the Adaptive Gain Operation topic of the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in adaptive gain configuration.

Input Automix Block

Double-click the Automix block to open a drop-down menu. Select Auto-mixer to insert the automix processor into the block.

Figure 68. Automix Block and Drop-Down

Once the automix processor is inserted into the Automix block, double-click the block to open the Automix dialog box.

Input #1 - Automix AM Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 None Show AM Group Details Last Mic Mode ✓ Chairman Mode ✓ Current Max. NOM: 3 Gate Threshold -50.0 dB Off Reduction 60.0 dB Attack Time 10.0 ms Hold Time 400.0 ms Gate Status indicator Release Time 200.0 ms Monitor Gate ✓ Set Defaults Bypass OK Cancel

① Automix Channel Name
② AM Group Assignment Panel
③ Show AM Group Details Button
④ Automix Parameters
⑤ dBFS Meter
⑥ Gate Status Indicator
⑦ Monitor Gate Checkbox
⑧ Set Defaults Button
⑨ Bypass Button
10 OK Button
⑪ Cancel Button
⑫ Automix Help Button

Figure 69. Automix Dialog Box

1 Automix Channel Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined input name.
② AM Group Assignment Panel — Provides nine radio buttons to assign the current automix processor to an AM (automix) group. The default is None and leaves the automixer unassigned.
③ Show AM Group Details Button — Opens the Automix Groups dialog box (click the Automix Help button for more information regarding Automix Groups).
4 Automix Parameters — Provides configuration controls for all automix parameters.
⑤ dBFS Meter — Displays the post-automix signal level.
⑥ Gate Status Indicator — This LED lights when monitoring is enabled and the gate is open.
⑦ Monitor Gate Checkbox — Click the Monitor Gate checkbox to enable SIS responses regarding gate status (see Automixer Gate Monitoring on the next page).
⑧ Set Defaults Button — Resets all automix parameters to their default settings.
⑨ Bypass Button — Bypasses the automix processor. When the button is red, bypass is enabled.
10 OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Automix dialog box.
11 Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the Automix dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.
12 Automix Help Button — Opens the Automix topic of the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in configuring the automix processor.

Automixer Gate Monitoring

Automixer gate monitoring allows the user to track when an automixer gate opens or closes. This feature can be enabled by checking the Monitor Gate checkbox in an Automix dialog (see figure 69, ⑦ on the previous page). When automixer gate monitoring is enabled for a channel, an unsolicited message is sent when the gate has opened or closed. The response will include the Automixer OID, gate open or closed status, and the signal level immediately after the status has changed (see the Automixer Gate Monitoring commands on page 146 for SIS response syntax).

Comparing the automixer gate threshold setting to the gate status in the response will indicate whether the automixer gate has opened or closed. When the gate status in the response is 1024 or greater, the gate has opened, and when the gate status in the response is less than 1024, the gate has closed.

Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block

Double-click the pre-mixer Gain block to open the Pre-mixer Gain dialog box.

Figure 70. Input Pre-mixer Gain Block

The Pre-mixer Gain dialog box provides controls to boost, attenuate, and mute the signal after input processing occurs and before it is sent to the mix matrix.

Pre-mixer Go ① Input #1 12 -100 0.0 dB Mute OK Cancel

① Input Name
② Pre-mixer Gain Fader
③ Pre-mixer Gain Text Box
④ Mute Button
⑤ OK Button
⑥ Cancel Button
⑦ Pre-mixer Gain Help Button

Figure 71. Input Pre-mixer Gain Dialog Box

① Input Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined input name.
② Pre-mixer Gain Fader — Click and drag the gain fader to provide up to 12 dB of gain or 100 dB of attenuation in 1 dB steps. Click the fader and use the or keys to adjust the fader up or down in 1 dB steps.
③ Pre-mixer Gain Text Box — Enter a gain or attenuation value in 0.1 dB steps.
4 Mute Button — Mutes signal at the pre-mixer stage, preventing it from reaching the mix matrices.
⑤ OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Pre-mixer Gain dialog box.

⑥ Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Pre-mixer Gain dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.

7 Pre-mixer Gain Help Button — Opens the Pre-mixer Gain topic of the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in understanding operating the Pre-mixer Gain dialog.

Aux Inputs

Eight Aux inputs are available with processing. These inputs can be assigned as one of the following:

• Player inputs that play audio files stored in the DMP 128 Plus internal memory (see Player Input on the next page)
• USB inputs that receive audio via the rear panel USB audio port (see USB Input on page 45)
  • VoIP lines for use with a VoIP network (V models only, see VoIP Input on page 45)

graph LR
    A["Aux In #1"] --> B["FLST"]
    C["Aux In #2"] --> D["FLST"]
    E["Aux In #3"] --> F["FLST"]
    G["Aux In #4"] --> H["FLST"]
    I["Aux In #5"] --> J["FLST"]
    K["Aux In #6"] --> L["FLST"]
    M["Aux In #7"] --> N["FLST"]
    O["Aux In #8"] --> P["FLST"]
    B --> Q["DYN"]
    D --> R["DYN"]
    F --> S["DYN"]
    H --> T["DYN"]
    J --> U["DYN"]
    L --> V["DYN"]
    N --> W["DYN"]
    P --> X["DYN"]
    Q --> Y["BUCK"]
    R --> Z["BUCK"]
    S --> AA["BUCK"]
    T --> AB["BUCK"]
    U --> AC["BUCK"]
    V --> AD["BUCK"]
    W --> AE["BUCK"]
    X --> AF["BUCK"]
    Y --> AG["BUCK"]
    Z --> AH["BUCK"]
    AA --> AI["BUCK"]
    AB --> AJ["BUCK"]
    AC --> AK["BUCK"]
    AD --> AL["BUCK"]
    AE --> AM["BUCK"]
    AF --> AN["BUCK"]
    AG --> AO["BUCK"]
    AH --> AP["BUCK"]
    AI --> AQ["BUCK"]
    AJ --> AR["BUCK"]
    AK --> AS["BUCK"]
    AL --> AT["BUCK"]
    AM --> AU["BUCK"]
    AN --> AV["BUCK"]
    AO --> AW["BUCK"]
    AP --> AX["BUCK"]
    AQ --> AY["BUCK"]
    AR --> AZ["BUCK"]
    AS --> BA["BUCK"]
    AT --> BB["BUCK"]
    AU --> BC["BUCK"]
    AV --> BD["BUCK"]
    AW --> BE["BUCK"]
    AX --> BF["BUCK"]
    AY --> BG["BUCK"]
    AZ --> BH["BUCK"]

Figure 72. Aux Inputs Panel

Renaming an Aux Input

1. Click the input name field.

Figure 73. Aux Input Name Field

1. Delete or highlight the text and type the desired name.

Figure 74. New Aux Input Name

1. Press the key or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new name. Press the key to navigate to and highlight the next name field.

Figure 75. Renamed Aux Input

NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit an Aux input name.

Aux Input Building Blocks

Building blocks can be applied to all eight Aux input channels. These buildings blocks function the same as the mic/line input building blocks (see Input Building Blocks on page 22 for more information on configuring Aux input building blocks.

Aux Input Processing

The input processing chain in DSP Configurator is visually represented by a string of blocks. Each block contains a specific processor or type of processor. Aux Inputs 1 through 8 contain the following signal processing chain:

1. Aux Input Gain Block
2. Aux Input Filter Block
3. Aux Input Dynamics Block (2)
4. Aux Input Ducking Block
5. Aux Input Automix Block
6. Aux Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block

Aux Input Gain Block

By default, the Aux input gain block does not have an input source selected. Double-click the block to open the input selection drop-down, presenting three options for each Aux input source:

• Player — Plays audio files stored on the DMP 128 Plus internal memory.
• USB — Receives audio input from the rear panel USB port.
  • VoIP (V models only) — Receives audio input from the VoIP network.

Player Input

Double-click the Aux input gain block and hover the mouse over Player... to display the eight available players. If no audio file is assigned to the player, the player displays [unassigned]. If an audio file is assigned to the player, the player displays the filename (see Players on page 75 for more information on configuring players). Select one of the players to insert it as the source for the selected Aux input.

Player... USB... Player 1: [unassigned] Player 2: [unassigned] Player 3: [unassigned] Player 4: [unassigned] Player 5: [unassigned] Player 6: [unassigned] Player 7: [unassigned] Player 8: [unassigned]

Figure 76. Aux Input Player Selection

Once a player is selected as an Aux input source, start and stop controls are available in Live mode by right clicking the input gain dialog and hovering over Player Control....

Insert... Player Control... Mark Row Start Player Stop Player

Figure 77. Player Start and Stop Controls

USB Input

Double-click the Aux input gain block and hover the mouse over USB... to display the four available USB audio channels. Select one of the USB channels to insert it as the source for the selected Aux input.

The four USB channels appear as two pairs of stereo channels:

• USB 1 left and right channels are for communications audio from a connected computer.
  • USB 2 left and right channels are for playback audio from a connected computer.

The DMP 128 Plus appears both as a communications and as a playback audio device in the operating system of the host computer. Select the DMP 128 Plus as the output device for both communication audio and playback audio to route audio from the host computer to the DMP 128 Plus via the rear panel USB audio port.

Player... USB... USB 1: Left Channel USB 1: Right Channel USB 2: Left Channel USB 2: Right Channel

Figure 78. Aux Input USB Selection

VoIP Input

Double-click the Aux input gain block and hover the mouse over VoIP... to display the eight available VoIP lines. Select one of the VoIP lines to insert it as the source for the selected Aux input. Aux inputs with VoIP lines selected as the source receive signal via the far end of the VoIP network. VoIP lines can be assigned to Aux channels before the line is registered with the call server; however, VoIP lines must be registered with a call server and configured from the DMP 128 Plus VoIP web page before these inputs can function properly (see DMP 128 Plus VoIP Web Page on page 167). Multiple appearances of a single line can be placed on multiple Aux inputs for conference calling capabilities.

NOTE: When a VoIP line is assigned as the source or removed from Aux input, the same VoIP line is assigned to or removed from the corresponding Aux output.

Player... USB... VoIP... VoIP Line 1 VoIP Line 2 VoIP Line 3 VoIP Line 4 VoIP Line 5 VoIP Line 6 VoIP Line 7 VoIP Line 8

Figure 79. Aux Input VoIP Line Selection

Aux Input Dialog Box

Once a source has been selected for an Aux input, double-click the Aux input gain block to open the Aux Input dialog box.

Aux Input ① Aux In #1 24 -18 0.0 dB -60 -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -120.0 + Polarity Mute OK Cancel

① Aux Input Name
② Aux Input Gain Fader
③ Aux Input Gain Text Box
④ Polarity Button
⑤ Mute Button
⑥ OK Button
⑦ Cancel Button
⑧ Aux Input Help Button

Figure 80. Aux Input Gain Dialog Box

① Input Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined Aux input name.
② Aux Input Gain Fader — Click and drag the gain fader to provide up to 24 dB of gain or 18 dB of attenuation in 1 dB steps. Click the fader and use the or keys to adjust the fader up or down in 1 dB steps.
③ Aux Input Gain Text Box — Enter a gain or attenuation value in 0.1 dB steps.
4 Polarity Button — Click this button to invert the signal polarity of the selected Aux input. When the button displays the black + symbol on a gray field (☐), the polarity is normal. When the button displays the black - symbol on a yellow field (☐), the polarity is inverted.
⑤ Mute Button — Mutes signal at the Aux input stage, preventing it from going any further in the signal processing chain.
⑥ OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Aux Input dialog box.
⑦ Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Aux Input dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.
⑧ Aux Input Help Button — Opens the Aux Input topic of the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in configuring Aux input sources.

Aux Input Filter Block

One filter block is available for each Aux input channel. This filter block functions the same as the mic/line input filter block (see Input Filter Block on page 26 for information on configuring the Aux input filter block).

Aux Input Dynamics Block

Two dynamics blocks are available for each Aux input. These blocks function the same as the mic/line input dynamics blocks (see Input Dynamics Blocks on page 32 for information on configuring the Aux input dynamics blocks).

Aux Input Ducking Block

One ducking block is available for each Aux input. This block functions the same as the mic/line input ducking block (see Input Ducking Block on page 38 for information on configuring the Aux input ducking block).

Aux Input Automix Block

One automix block is available for each Aux input. This block functions the same as the mic/line input automix block (see Input Automix Block on page 40 for information on configuring the Aux input automix block).

Aux Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block

The Aux input pre-mixer gain block functions the same as the mic/line input pre-mixer gain block (see Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block on page 42 for information on configuring the Aux input pre-mixer gain block).

Virtual Returns

Virtual returns receive signal when inputs are routed to the virtual send bus (see figure 93 on page 56). Sixteen virtual return channels are available and are labeled A through P. These channels can be used in a number of applications. For example, they can act as an AEC reference channel or be used for sub-mix processing.

graph TD
    A["VrtlRet #A"] --> FDS1["FDS"]
    B["VrtlRet #B"] --> FDS2["FDS"]
    C["VrtlRet #C"] --> FDS3["FDS"]
    D["VrtlRet #D"] --> FDS4["FDS"]
    E["VrtlRet #E"] --> FDS5["FDS"]
    F["VrtlRet #F"] --> FDS6["FDS"]
    G["VrtlRet #G"] --> FDS7["FDS"]
    H["VrtlRet #H"] --> FDS8["FDS"]
    I["VrtlRet #I"] --> FDS9["FDS"]
    J["VrtlRet #J"] --> FDS10["FDS"]
    K["VrtlRet #K"] --> FDS11["FDS"]
    L["VrtlRet #L"] --> FDS12["FDS"]
    M["VrtlRet #M"] --> FDS13["FDS"]
    N["VrtlRet #N"] --> FDS14["FDS"]
    O["VrtlRet #O"] --> FDS15["FDS"]
    P["VrtlRet #P"] --> FDS16["FDS"]
    FDS1 --> GAIN1["GAIN"]
    FDS2 --> GAIN2["GAIN"]
    FDS3 --> GAIN3["GAIN"]
    FDS4 --> GAIN4["GAIN"]
    FDS5 --> GAIN5["GAIN"]
    FDS6 --> GAIN6["GAIN"]
    FDS7 --> GAIN7["GAIN"]
    FDS8 --> GAIN8["GAIN"]
    FDS9 --> GAIN9["GAIN"]
    FDS10 --> GAIN10["GAIN"]
    FDS11 --> GAIN11["GAIN"]
    FDS12 --> GAIN12["GAIN"]
    FDS13 --> GAIN13["GAIN"]
    FDS14 --> GAIN14["GAIN"]
    FDS15 --> GAIN15["GAIN"]
    FDS16 --> GAIN16["GAIN"]
    FDS17 --> GAIN17["GAIN"]
    FDS18 --> GAIN18["GAIN"]
    FDS19 --> GAIN19["GAIN"]
    FDS20 --> GAIN20["GAIN"]
    FDS21 --> GAIN21["GAIN"]
    FDS22 --> GAIN22["GAIN"]
    FDS23 --> GAIN23["GAIN"]
    FDS24 --> GAIN24["GAIN"]
    FDS25 --> GAIN25["GAIN"]
    FDS26 --> GAIN26["GAIN"]
    FDS27 --> GAIN27["GAIN"]
    FDS28 --> GAIN28["GAIN"]
    FDS29 --> GAIN29["GAIN"]
    FDS30 --> GAIN30["GAIN"]
    FDS31 --> GAIN31["GAIN"]
    FDS32 --> GAIN32["GAIN"]
    FDS33 --> GAIN33["GAIN"]
    FDS34 --> GAIN34["GAIN"]
    FDS35 --> GAIN35["GAIN"]
    FDS36 --> GAIN36["GAIN"]
    FDS37 --> GAIN37["GAIN"]
    FDS38 --> GAIN38["GAIN"]
    FDS39 --> GAIN39["GAIN"]
    FDS40 --> GAIN40["GAIN"]

Figure 81. Virtual Returns Input Panel

Renaming a Virtual Return

1. Click the virtual return name field.

VrtiRet #A

Figure 82. Virtual Return Name Field

1. Delete or highlight the text and type the desired name.

AEC Ref

Figure 83. New Virtual Return Name

1. Press the key or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new name. Press the key to navigate to and highlight the next name field.

AEC Ref

Figure 84. Renamed Virtual Return

NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit a Virtual Return name.

Virtual Return Building Blocks

Building blocks can be applied to all 16 virtual return channels (see Input Building Blocks on page 22 for more information on configuring virtual return building blocks).

Virtual Return Processing

Virtual returns A through D contain the following signal processing chain:

1. Virtual Return Feedback Suppressor Block
2. Virtual Return Filter Block
3. Virtual Return Dynamics Block
4. Virtual Return Delay Block
5. Virtual Return Pre-Mixer Gain Block

Virtual returns E through P contain the following signal processing chain:

1. Virtual Return Filter Block
2. Virtual Return Dynamics Block
3. Virtual Return Delay Block
4. Virtual Return Pre-Mixer Gain Block

NOTE: Only Virtual Return channels A through D contain Feedback Suppression processing blocks.

Virtual Return Feedback Suppressor Block

Use the feedback suppressor when there is an indication of feedback during live operation. Dynamic filters automatically detect feedback on a live mic channel, and engage a set of up to 5 fixed and 15 dynamic filters to counteract feedback at the detected frequencies. The dynamic filters act in a “first in, first out” rotation. If all 15 dynamic filters are employed and an additional feedback frequency is detected, the first feedback frequency detected is overwritten.

To avoid a new feedback frequency overwriting a previously detected frequency, up to 5 dynamic filters can be transferred into fixed filters. Once a dynamic filter is transferred into a fixed filter, it can only be overwritten by manually assigning a new frequency to the filter.

Double-click the feedback suppressor block to show the feedback suppressor drop-down menu. Select Feedback Suppressor to insert a feedback suppressor processor into the signal chain.

Feedback Suppressor

Figure 85. Feedback Suppressor Block and Drop-Down Menu

After inserting the feedback suppressor in the signal chain, double-click the FBS block to open the Feedback Suppressor dialog box.

Feedback Suppressor Dialog Box

The Feedback Suppressor dialog box contains three tabs for configuring feedback suppression.

• Settings Tab on the next page
  • Dynamic Filters Tab on page 51
  • Fixed Filters Tab on page 52

Settings Tab

IntRat AV - Feedback Suppressor Frequency Settings Dynamic Filters Reset Filters For Composite View show: • Only Dynamic FBS filters • Only Fixed FBS filters • Fixed & Dynamic FBS filters Mode: 30,000 Attack Time Attack Time 10.0 ms Hold Time Enable: Hold Time: 0 HOURS MIN SEC Clear All Lock Set Default OK Cancel

① Settings Tab
② Composite View Panel
③ Filter Graph
④ Q Adjustment Panel
⑤ Attack Time Panel
⑥ Hold Time Panel
⑦ Bypass FBS Button
⑧ Set Defaults Button
⑨ OK Button
10 Cancel Button

Figure 86. Feedback Suppressor Dialog Box - Settings Tab

① Settings Tab — Provides access to the global FBS settings.
② Composite View Panel — Three radio buttons control which filters are displayed in the filter graph:
• Only Dynamic FBS Filters
• Only Fixed FBS Filters
• Fixed & Dynamic FBS Filters (default)

③ Filter Graph — Displays the dynamic filters, fixed filters, or both, as selected in the Composite View panel.

④ Q Adjustment Panel — Adjust the default Q parameter of the dynamic filters using the text box or the up/down spinner controls.

⑤ Attack Time Panel — Adjust the default Attack Time for dynamic filters.

⑥ Hold Time Panel — Provides an Enable checkbox, that enables the Hold Time parameter. Entering a time into the Hold Time text boxes sets how long each dynamic filter will hold before removing the filter.

⑦ Bypass FBS — Turns off feedback detection when bypass is engaged (button is red when bypass is engaged). Only the dynamic filters are bypassed. Fixed filters remain active.

⑧ Set Defaults Button — Resets parameters on all tabs to their default values and positions.

⑨ OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Feedback Suppressor dialog box.

10 Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Feedback Suppressor dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.

Dynamic Filters Tab

VerNet FA - Feedback Supervisor Frequency Settings Dynamic Flats Feed Flats 1 Frequency 20.0 Cut 0.0 Move to Feed Clear 2 Frequency 20.0 Cut 0.0 Move to Feed Clear 3 Frequency 20.0 Cut 0.0 Move to Feed Clear 4 Frequency 20.0 Cut 0.0 Move to Feed Clear 5 Frequency 20.0 Cut 0.0 Move to Feed Clear 6 Clear All Lock Set Defaults OK Cancel

① Dynamic Filters Tab
② Dynamic Filters List
③ Move to Fixed Button
④ Clear Button
⑤ Clear All Button
⑥ Lock Button
⑦ Bypass FBS
⑧ Set Defaults Button
⑨ OK Button
10 Cancel Button

Figure 87. Feedback Suppressor Dialog Box - Dynamic Filters Tab

① Dynamic Filters Tab — Provides access to dynamic filter configuration options.
② Dynamic Filters List — Displays a list of 15 dynamic feedback suppression filters. As feedback is detected on the virtual return channel, dynamic filters are applied to suppress feedback with the Q parameter defined in the Settings tab.
③ Move to Fixed Button — Transfers the dynamic filter along with its current parameters to the Fixed Filters tab, allowing parameters to be edited. This frees up a filter slot in the Dynamic Filters list.
④ Clear Button — Clears the dynamic filter and contained parameters.
⑤ Clear All Button — Clears all dynamic filters and resets the feedback detection and suppression process.
⑥ Lock Button — Locks current dynamic filters and prevents more dynamic filters from being applied.
⑦ Bypass FBS Button — Bypasses the FBS processor. When the button is red, FBS is bypassed.
⑧ Set Defaults Button — Resets parameters on all tabs to their default values and positions.
⑨ OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Feedback Suppressor dialog box.
10 Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Feedback Suppressor dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.

Fixed Filters Tab

VerRat AA - Feedback Suppressor Level Frequency Settings | Dynamic Ration Road Limits 1 Match 5000 Boost / Cut 30.0 Q: 20000 2 Unused 3 Unused 4 Unused 5 Unused 6 Clear All Lock Set Defaults OK Cancel

① Fixed Filters Tab
② Fixed Filters List
③ Filter Parameters
④ Single Filter Bypass Button
⑤ Clear All Button
⑥ Bypass FBS Button
⑦ Set Defaults Button
⑧ OK Button
⑨ Cancel Button
10 Feedback Suppressor Help Button

Figure 88. Feedback Suppressor Dialog Box - Fixed Filters Tab

① Fixed Filters Tab — Provides access to fixed filter configuration options.
② Fixed Filters List — Displays up to 5 fixed feedback suppression filters.
③ Filter Parameters — Configure the Frequency, Boost/Cut, and Q parameters for each fixed filter using the text boxes.
4 Single Filter Bypass Button — Bypasses only the filter associated with that filter slot. When the button is red, the filter is bypassed.
⑤ Clear All Button — Clears all fixed filters from the list.
⑥ Bypass FBS Button — Bypasses the FBS processor. When the button is red, FBS is bypassed.
⑦ Set Defaults Button — Resets parameters on all tabs to their default values and positions.
⑧ OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Feedback Suppressor dialog box.
⑨ Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Feedback Suppressor dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.
10 Feedback Suppressor Help Button — Opens the Feedback Suppressor topic of the DSP Configurator Help file for further assistance in understanding and operating the feedback suppression processor.

Virtual Return Filter Block

One filter block is available for each virtual return channel. This filter block functions the same as the mic/line input filter block (see Input Filter Block on page 26 for information on configuring the virtual return filter block).

Virtual Return Dynamics Block

One dynamics block is available for each virtual return channel. This block functions the same as the mic/line input dynamics block (see Input Dynamics Blocks on page 32 for information on configuring the virtual return dynamics block).

Virtual Return Delay Block

One delay block is available for each virtual return channel. This block functions the same as the mic/line input delay block (see Input Delay Block on page 37 for information on configuring the virtual return delay block).

Virtual Return Pre-Mixer Gain Block

The virtual return pre-mixer gain block functions the same as the mic/line input pre-mixer gain block (see Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block on page 42 for information on configuring the virtual return pre-mixer gain block).

Expansion and AT Inputs

The expansion inputs receive signal via the rear panel EXP port when connected with another EXP enabled device. AT inputs receive signal from the Dante network when connected to an audio network (AT models only). The DMP 128 Plus can receive 16 channels of audio via the EXP port and 48 channels of audio via Dante (AT models only). On a DMP 128 Plus AT model, AT inputs 33 through 48 can be used for the EXP inputs allowing use of the Dante network and the EXP port simultaneously (see Expansion Bus on page 94).

Renaming an Expansion or AT Input

NOTES:

• AT inputs only appear on DMP 128 Plus AT models.
• AT inputs can only be renamed when connected in Live mode. Default input names appear in Emulate mode.

• Renaming an AT input in DSP Configurator affects the receiver name in Dante Controller. Alternatively, renaming a receiver channel name in Dante Controller affects the name displayed in DSP Configurator (see Renaming a Receiver or Transmitter on page 113).

• Click the expansion or AT input name field.

1 Exp #1

Figure 89. Expansion Input Name Field

1. Delete or highlight the text and type the desired name.

1 Rack 1 DMP 2

Figure 90. New Expansion Input Name

1. Press the key or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new name. Press the key to navigate to and highlight the next name field.

1 Rack 1 DMP 2

Figure 91. Renamed Expansion

NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit an Expansion Input name.

Expansion and AT Inputs Overview

With the Extron Expansion Port (EXP), two EXP enabled devices can be connected for bidirectional communication of 16 audio channels. When two units are connected, one unit must be set as the Primary Unit and the other must be set as the Secondary Unit (see Expansion Bus on page 94). This synchronizes the sampling clocks of the two units.

AT inputs allow a DMP 128 Plus AT model to receive signal from the audio network. Network audio routing is done with Dante Controller (see Dante Controller on page 107).

graph TD
    A["1 Exp_In-01"] --> B["AT"]
    C["2 Exp_In-02"] --> D["AT"]
    E["3 Exp_In-03"] --> F["AT"]
    G["4 Exp_In-04"] --> H["AT"]
    I["5 Exp_In-05"] --> J["AT"]
    K["6 Exp_In-06"] --> L["AT"]
    M["7 Exp_In-07"] --> N["AT"]
    O["8 Exp_In-08"] --> P["AT"]
    Q["AT Inputs 9 - 16"] --> R["AT Inputs 17 - 24"]
    S["AT Inputs 25 - 32"] --> T["Expansion Inputs 1 - 8"]
    U["Expansion Inputs 9 - 16"] --> V["Expansion Inputs 9 - 16"]

Figure 92. Expansion Bus Panel with AT and Expansion Inputs

Expansion and AT Inputs Processing

The expansion and AT inputs contain two processor blocks in their signal chain:

1. Automix Block
2. Pre-mixer Gain Block

Expansion and AT Input Automix Block

One automix block is available for each expansion and AT input. This block functions the same as the mic/line input automix block (see Input Automix Block on page 40 for information on configuring the EXP input automix block).

Expansion and AT Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block

The expansion and AT input pre-mixer gain block functions the same as the mic/line input pre-mixer gain block (see Input Pre-Mixer Gain Block on page 42 for information on configuring the virtual return pre-mixer gain block).

Mix-Points

DSP Configurator contains twelve mix matrices that connect all inputs and outputs (see figure 93 on the next page). The mix matrices set post-processing mix levels.

Each input is connected to a mix-point for the signal to be routed to an output. In general, mix levels are set relative to each other, achieving a blend of input signals at an optimal output level, close to, but not exceeding 0 dBFS at the output.

NOTE: In order for mix-points to appear in the workspace, the input group sending signal to the mix-point must be expanded and the input channel must be visible.

graph TD
    A["Input 1: Input F1"] --> B["Array 1"]
    C["Input 2: Input F2"] --> D["Array 2"]
    E["Input 3: Input F3"] --> F["Array 3"]
    G["Input 4: Input F4"] --> H["Array 4"]
    I["Input 5: Input F5"] --> J["Array 5"]
    K["Input 6: Input F6"] --> L["Array 6"]
    M["Input 7: Input F7"] --> N["Array 7"]
    O["Input 8: Input F8"] --> P["Array 8"]
    Q["Input 9: Input F9"] --> R["Array 9"]
    S["Input 10: Input F10"] --> T["Array 10"]
    U["Input 11: Input F11"] --> V["Array 11"]
    W["Input 12: Input F12"] --> X["Array 12"]
    Y["Input 13: Input F13"] --> Z["Array 13"]
    AA["Input 14: Input F14"] --> AB["Array 14"]
    AC["Input 15: Input F15"] --> AD["Array 15"]
    AE["Input 16: Input F16"] --> AF["Array 16"]

    B --> AG["Output 1: Output F1"]
    D --> AH["Output 2: Output F2"]
    F --> AI["Output 3: Output F3"]
    H --> AJ["Output 4: Output F4"]
    J --> AK["Output 5: Output F5"]
    L --> AL["Output 6: Output F6"]
    M --> AM["Output 7: Output F7"]
    N --> AN["Output 8: Output F8"]
    O --> AO["Output 9: Output F9"]
    P --> AP["Output 10: Output F10"]
    Q --> AQ["Output 11: Output F11"]
    R --> AR["Output 12: Output F12"]

    AG --> AS["External Outputs"]
    AH --> AS
    AI --> AS
    AJ --> AS
    AK --> AS
    AL --> AS
    AM --> AS
    AN --> AS
    AO --> AS
    AP --> AS

    AS --> AT["Output 1: Output F1"]
    AS --> AU["Output 2: Output F2"]
    AS --> AV["Output 3: Output F3"]
    AS --> AW["Output 4: Output F4"]
    AS --> AX["Output 5: Output F5"]
    AS --> AY["Output 6: Output F6"]
    AS --> AZ["Output 7: Output F7"]
    AS --> BA["Output 8: Output F8"]
    AS --> BB["Output 9: Output F9"]
    AS --> BC["Output 10: Output F10"]
    AS --> BD["Output 11: Output F11"]
    AS --> BE["Output 12: Output F12"]

    AT --> BF["Output 1: Output F1"]
    AU --> BG["Output 2: Output F2"]
    AV --> BH["Output 3: Output F3"]
    AW --> BI["Output 4: Output F4"]
    AX --> BJ["Output 5: Output F5"]
    AY --> BK["Output 6: Output F6"]
    AZ --> BL["Output 7: Output F7"]

    AU --> BM["Output 8: Output F8"]
    AV --> BN["Output 9: Output F9"]

    AU --> BO["Output 9: Output F10"]

    AT --> BP["Output 9: Output F11"]

    AU --> BQ["Output B: Output F12"]

    AU --> BR["Output B: Output F13"]

    AU --> BS["Output B: Output F14"]

    AU --> BT["Output B: Output F15"]

    AU --> BU["Output B: Output F16"]

    AU --> BV["Output B: Output F17"]

    AU --> BW["Output B: Output F18"]

    AU --> BX["Output B: Output F19"]

    AU --> BY["Output B: Output F20"]

    AU --> BZ["Output B: Output F21"]

    AU --> CA["Output B: Output F22"]

    AU --> CB["Output B: Output F23"]

    AU --> CC["Output B: Output F24"]

    AU --> CD["Output B: Output F25"]

    AU --> CE["Output B: Output F26"]

    AU --> CF["Output B: Output F27"]

    AU --> CG["Output B: Output F28"]

    AU --> CH["Output B: Output F29"]

    AU --> CI["Output B: Output F30"]

    AU --> CJ["Output B: Output F31"]

    AU --> CK["Output B: Output F32"]

    AU --> CL["Output B: Output F33"]

    AU --> CM["Output B: Output F34"]

    AU --> CN["Output B: Output F35"]

    AU --> CO["Output B: Output F36"]

    AU --> CP["Output B: Output F37"]

    AU --> CQ["Output B: Output F38"]

    AU --> CR["Output B: Output F39"]

    AU --> CS["Output B: Output F40"]

    AU --> CT["Output B: Output F41"]

    AU --> CU["Output B: Output F42"]

    AU --> CV["Output B: Output F43"]

    AU --> CW["Output B: Output F44"]

    AU --> CX["Output B: Output F45"]

    AU --> CY["Output B: Output F46"]

    AU --> CZ["Output B: Output F47"]

    AU --> DA["Output B: Output F48"]

    AU --> DB["Output B: Output F49"]

    AU --> DC["Output B: Output F50"]

    AU --> DD["Output B: Output F51"]

    AU --> DE["Output B: Output F52"]

    AU --> DF["Output B: Output F53"]

    AU --> DG["Output B: Output F54"]

    AU --> DH["Output B: Output F55"]

    AU --> DI["Output B: Output F56"]

    AU --> DJ["Output B: Output F57"]

    AU --> DK["Output B: Output F58"]

    AU --> DL["Output B: Output F59"]

    AU --> DV["Output B: Output F60"]

    AU --> DW["Output B: Output F61"]

    AU --> DX["Output B: Output F62"]

    AU --> DX

</details>

Figure 93. DSP Configurator Mix Matrices

① Mic/Line Inputs to Line and Aux Outputs   
② Mic/Line Inputs to EXP Outputs   
③ Mic/Line Inputs to Virtual Sends   
④ Aux Inputs to Line and Aux Outputs   
⑤ Aux Inputs to EXP Outputs   
⑥ Aux Inputs to Virtual Sends   
⑦ Virtual Returns to Line and Aux Outputs   
⑧ Virtual Returns to EXP Outputs   
⑨ Virtual Returns to Virtual Sends   
⑩ EXP Inputs to Line and Aux Outputs   
⑪ EXP Inputs to EXP Outputs   
⑫ EXP Inputs to Virtual Sends

<h1 id="mix-point-dialog-box">Mix-Point Dialog Box</h1>

Double-click a mix-point to open the Mix-point dialog box. Alternatively, highlight a mix-point with a single click and press the <Enter> key to open the Mix-point dialog box.

![](images/aca0eea410b52a1d26af813c4010c78f762b4adeaf754d0fcd5cf2e952452548.jpg)

<details>
<summary>text_image</summary>

Mix-point
① Input #1
Output #1
12
-100
0.0 dB
②
③
④
Main
⑤ No Automixing
Includes Automixing
Filter Processing Only
⑥ Input to offset to 0 dB
OK Cancel
</details>

① Mix-point Input and Output   
② Mix-point Fader   
③ Level Text Box   
④ Mute Button   
⑤ Mix Dot Selection   
⑥ OK Button   
⑦ Cancel Button

Figure 94. Mix-point Dialog Box

① Mix-point Input and Output — Displays which input (top) and output (bottom) the mix-point is connecting.   
② Mix-point Fader — Click and drag the mix-point fader to provide up to 12 dB of gain or 100 dB of attenuation in 1 dB steps. Click the fader and use the <Up Arrow> or <Down Arrow> keys to change the level in 1 dB steps.   
③ Level Text Box — Allows specific level values to be entered in 0.1 dB steps.   
④ Mute Button — Mutes the mix-point (muted by default). When the button is red, the mix point is muted.   
⑤ Mix Dot Selection — Three radio buttons provide options to choose the type of input processing applied to the mix-point.

NOTE: Mix dot selections are not available on Virtual Return or EXP mix-points.

⑥ OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Mix-point dialog box.

⑦ Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Mix Point dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.

<h1 id="mix-point-context-menu">Mix-Point Context Menu</h1>

Right-click a mix-point to open the mix-point context menu. This menu provides quick options to operate mix-points.

![](images/42e3acfe01ac91188959e11cf3d98edde61a36edc8b22e8693dbec9fa16f9163.jpg)

<details>
<summary>text_image</summary>

① Mute
② Unmute
③ Include Automixing
④ Bypass Processing
⑤ Cut
⑥ Copy
⑦ Paste
⑧ Delete    Del
⑨ Mark Row
⑩ Unmark Row
</details>

Figure 95. Mix-Point Context Menu

① Mute — Mutes the mix-point.   
② Unmute — Unmutes the mix-point and creates an audio path between an input and output.   
③ Include Automixing — Includes automix processing at the mix-point and marks the mix-dot orange to signify automixing is included.   
4 Bypass Processing — Bypasses signal processing, except for filters, at the mix-point and marks the mix-dot green to signify signal processing is bypassed.   
⑤ Cut — Cuts the mix-point parameter configuration, preparing it to be pasted to another mix-point. The parameter configuration information is not removed until it is pasted to another mix-point.   
⑥ Copy — Copies the mix-point parameter configuration, leaving the mix-point intact and preparing it to be pasted to another mix-point.   
⑦ Paste — Pastes a previously cut or copied mix-point parameter configuration to the selected mix-point.   
⑧ Delete — Deletes the mix-point parameter configuration and mutes the mix-point.   
⑨ Mark Row — Marks the entire row containing the selected mix-point, highlighting all of the elements.   
10 Unmark Row — Unmarks the entire row containing the selected mix-point.

<h1 id="dsp-configurator-outputs">DSP Configurator Outputs</h1>

The outputs run along the top right of the main workspace in DSP Configurator. There are three types of outputs available:

• Outputs on the next page   
• Aux Outputs on page 63   
• Expansion Outputs on page 65

These outputs receive signal when mix-point connections are made between an input and an output in the mix-matrices.

Each output panel can be expanded or collapsed by clicking the ☐(expand) or ☐(collapse) buttons.

<h1 id="outputs">Outputs</h1>

Eight outputs are available in the Outputs panel and route signal to the eight rear panel line level analog outputs. Signal routed to these outputs can also be transmitted onto the Dante network on DMP 128 Plus AT models.

![](images/29c0a03befb5c98b7e088b39003ae2071e08b1eca5a74bb4a91e2baa9fe20d13.jpg)

<details>
<summary>flowchart</summary>

```mermaid
graph TD
    A["Input 1"] --> B["Exansion Outputs"]
    C["Input 2"] --> B
    D["Input 3"] --> B
    E["Input 4"] --> B
    F["Input 5"] --> B
    G["Input 6"] --> B
    H["Input 7"] --> B
    I["Input 8"] --> B
    J["Output #1"] --> K["Aux Outputs Expansion Outputs"]
    L["Output #2"] --> K
    M["Output #3"] --> K
    N["Output #4"] --> K
    O["Output #5"] --> K
    P["Output #6"] --> K
    Q["Output #7"] --> K
    R["Output #8"] --> K

Figure 96. Outputs Panel

Naming an Output

1. Click the output name field.

Figure 97. Output Name Field

1. Delete the text and type the desired output name.

Figure 98. New Output Name

1. Press the key or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new output name. Press the key to navigate to and highlight the next name field.

Figure 99. Renamed Output

NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit an Output name.

Output Building Blocks

Extron building blocks are a quick configuration tool that can significantly reduce configuration time. A building block is a collection of processor and gain settings for an input or output processing chain. These building blocks have been built by Extron based on extensive use and testing with each intended application or specific device.

graph LR
    A["TRIM"] --> B["DLY"]
    B --> C["FILT"]
    C --> D["DYN"]
    D --> E["ATT"]
    E --> F["Output #1"]
    F --> G["1"]

Figure 100. Accessing Building Blocks on an Output

Click the output number to open the Building Blocks dialog box.

Buildings Blocks ① Outputs Telephone Tx Codec Tx Record Out Voice Lift Out Program Out Speaker EQ SM 28 SF 228T SF 3CT LP SI 26CT SI 3CT LP FF 120T FF 220T

① Output Building Blocks List
② Add a Building Block Button
③ Delete a Building Block Button
④ New Folder Button
⑤ Building Blocks Help Button

Figure 101. Output Building Blocks Dialog Box

① Output Building Blocks List — Contains building blocks for output channels.
② Add a Building Block Button — Allows users to create custom building blocks, saving the currently applied gain and processor settings on the selected channel. Click the icon to open the Add a Building Block dialog box. This allows users to name the new custom building block and choose the folder to save the block to an existing folder, or create a new folder.

Add a Building Block Name: Custom Building Block Create In: Building Blocks New Folder Add Cancel

Figure 102. Add a Building Block Dialog Box

③ Delete a Building Block Button — Deletes the currently selected building block or building block folder. If default building blocks are deleted, they can be restored from the Organize Building Blocks dialog box.
4 New Folder Button —Creates a new folder or sub-folder.
⑤ Building Blocks Help Button — Opens the Building Blocks topic of the DSP Configurator Help file. This topic contains more information on the different types of building blocks for inputs and outputs.

Output Processing

The output processing chain in DSP Configurator is represented by a string of blocks (see figure 103 below). Each block contains a specific processor or type of processor. Each output contains the following processor chain:

1. Output Trim Block
2. Output Delay Block
3. Output Filter Block
4. Output Dynamics Block
5. Output Attenuation Block

Figure 103. Output Processing Chain

Output Trim Block

Double-click the output Trim block to open the Post-mixer Trim dialog box.

Figure 104. Output Trim Block

The Post-mixer Trim dialog box provides pre-processing gain and attenuation control for the selected output.

Post-mixer Tri... ① Output #1 12 ② -12 0.0 dB ③ ④ OK Cancel

① Output Name
② Post-mixer Trim Fader
③ Post-mixer Trim Text Box
④ OK Button
⑤ Cancel Button

Figure 105. Post-mixer Trim Dialog Box

① Output Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined output name.
② Post-mixer Trim Fader — Click and drag the trim fader to provide up to 12 dB of gain or 12 dB of attenuation in 0.1 dB steps. Click the trim fader and use the or to adjust the fader up or down in 0.1 dB steps.
③ Post-mixer Trim Text Box — Allows the user to enter a gain or attenuation value in 0.1 dB steps.
④ OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Post-mixer Trim dialog box.
⑤ Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Post-mixer Trim dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.

Output Delay Block

One delay block is available for each output channel. This block functions the same as the mic/line input delay block (see Input Delay Block on page 37 for information on configuring the output delay block).

Output Filter Block

One filter block is available for each output channel. This filter block functions the same as the mic/line input filter block, except that there are 10 slots for filters instead of 5 (see Input Filter Block on page 26 for information on configuring output filters).

Output Dynamics Block

One dynamics block is available for each output channel. This block functions the same as the mic/line input dynamics block (see Input Dynamics Blocks on page 32 for information on configuring the output dynamics block).

Output Attenuation Block

Double-click the output Attenuation block to open the Attenuation dialog box.

Figure 106. Output Attenuation Block

The Attenuation dialog box provides attenuation control for the selected output.

Attenuation Output #1 0 -100 -60 -120.0 0.0 dB + Polarity Mute OK Cancel

① Output Name ⑥ Polarity Button
② Output Attenuation Fader ⑦ Mute Button
③ Output Attenuation Text Box ⑧ OK Button
④ dBFS Meter ⑨ Cancel Button
⑤ dBFS Text Readout

Figure 107. Attenuation Dialog Box

① Output Name — This name changes to match the default or user defined output name.
② Output Attenuation Fader — Click and drag the trim fader to provide up to 100 dB of attenuation. Click the trim fader and use the or to adjust the fader up or down in 1 dB steps.
③ Output Attenuation Text Box — Allows the user to enter a gain or attenuation value in 0.1 dB steps.
④ dBFS Meter — Provides post-attenuation and pre-mute a readout of the output signal level.
⑤ dBFS Text Readout — Displays a numerical readout of the output signal level.
⑥ Polarity Button — Click this button to invert the signal polarity of the selected output. When the button displays the black + symbol on a gray field (☐), the polarity is normal. When the button displays the black - symbol on a yellow field (☐), the polarity is inverted.

⑦ Mute Button — Mutes the signal at the output stage.
⑧ OK Button — Confirms changes made to the contained parameters and closes the Attenuation dialog box.
9 Cancel Button — Reverts any changes made to the contained parameters back to their states when the current instance of the Attenuation dialog box was opened and closes the dialog box.

Aux Outputs

Four Aux outputs (non-V models) or eight Aux outputs (V models only) are available in the Aux Outputs panel. These outputs can be configured to route signal to a host computer as USB audio via the rear panel USB audio port or to a VoIP network via a rear panel LAN port (V models only).

graph TD
    A["Input Line 1"] --> B["Add Out #1"]
    C["Input Line 2"] --> D["Aux Out #2"]
    E["Input Line 3"] --> F["Aux Out #3"]
    G["Input Line 4"] --> H["Aux Out #4"]
    B --> I["Aux Out #1"]
    D --> J["Aux Out #2"]
    F --> K["Aux Out #3"]
    H --> L["Aux Out #4"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#cff,stroke:#333

Figure 108. Aux Outputs Panel

Naming an Aux Output

1. Click the Aux output name field.

Figure 109. Aux Output Name Field

1. Delete the text and type the desired Aux output name.

Figure 110. New Aux Output Name

1. Press the key or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new output name. Press the to navigate to and highlight the next name field.

Figure 111. Renamed Aux Output

NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit an Aux output name.

Aux Output Processing

The Aux output processing chain in DSP Configurator is represented by a string of blocks (see figure 112 below). Each block contains a specific processor or type of processor. Each Aux output contains the following processor chain:

1. Aux Output Trim Block
2. Aux Output Filter Block
3. Aux Output Dynamics Block
4. Aux Output Gain Block

Figure 112. Aux Output Processing Chain

Aux Output Trim Block

One trim block is available for each Aux output channel. This trim block functions the same as the output trim block (see Output Trim Block on page 61 for more information on configuring the Aux output trim block).

Aux Output Filter Block

One filter block is available for each output channel. This filter block functions the same as the mic/line input filter block (see Input Filter Block on page 26 for information on configuring the Aux output filter block).

Aux Output Dynamics Block

One dynamics block is available for each output channel. This block functions the same as the mic/line input dynamics block (see Input Dynamics Blocks on page 32 for information on configuring the Aux output dynamics block).

Aux Output Gain Block

Double-click the Aux output gain block to access a drop-down menu that displays USB and VoIP (V models only) output options. A selection must be made before audio passes through an Aux output.

Figure 113. Aux Output Gain Block and Drop-Down Menu

The USB... and VoIP... selections in the Aux output mimic that of the Aux input (see Aux Input Gain Block on page 44).

NOTES:

• It is recommended that the USB 1 left and right channels be used for communication audio and USB 2 left and right channels be used for line input.
• When a VoIP line is assigned as the source for an Aux input, the same VoIP line is assigned to the corresponding Aux output. For example, if VoIP Line 1 is assigned to Aux input 1, VoIP line 1 is automatically assigned to Aux output 1 as well. Aux outputs can be reassigned to a different VoIP line.

Once an output has been selected, double-click the Aux output gain block again to open the Aux Output dialog box. This dialog box functions the same as the Aux input gain block (see Aux Input Gain Block on page 44 for information on configuring the Aux Output dialog box).

Expansion Outputs

Sixteen outputs are available in the Expansion Outputs panel. These outputs contain DSP processing capabilities and route audio to the rear panel EXP port when another EXP device is connected. These channels can also be transmitted to the Dante network on DMP 128 Plus AT models.

graph TD
    A["Expansion Outputs"] --> B["Virtual Send Bus"]
    B --> C1["Exp Out#1"]
    B --> C2["Exp Out#2"]
    B --> C3["Exp Out#3"]
    B --> C4["Exp Out#4"]
    B --> C5["Exp Out#5"]
    B --> C6["Exp Out#6"]
    B --> C7["Exp Out#7"]
    B --> C8["Exp Out#8"]
    B --> C9["Exp Out#9"]
    B --> C10["Exp Out#10"]
    B --> C11["Exp Out#11"]
    B --> C12["Exp Out#12"]
    B --> C13["Exp Out#13"]
    B --> C14["Exp Out#14"]
    B --> C15["Exp Out#15"]
    B --> C16["Exp Out#16"]

Figure 114. Expansion Outputs Panel

Naming an Expansion Output

1. Click the expansion output name field.

Figure 115. Expansion Output Name Field

1. Delete the text and type the desired expansion output name.

Figure 116. New Expansion Output Name

1. Press the key or navigate away from the field to confirm and apply the new output name. Press the to navigate to and highlight the next name field.

Figure 117. Renamed Expansion Output

NOTE: Follow the same procedure to edit an Expansion output name.

Expansion Output Processing

The expansion output processing chain in DSP Configurator is represented by a string of blocks (see figure 118 below). Each block contains a specific processor or type of processor. Each expansion output contains the following processor chain:

1. Expansion Output Trim Block
2. Expansion Output Delay Block
3. Expansion Output Filter Block
4. Expansion Output Dynamics Block
5. Expansion Output Attenuation Block

Figure 118. Expansion Output Processing Chain

Expansion Output Trim Block

Each expansion output contains a trim block. This block functions the same as the output trim block (see Output Trim Block on page 61 for information on configuring the expansion output trim block).

Expansion Output Delay Block

Each expansion output contains a delay block. This block functions the same as the mic/line input delay block (see Input Delay Block on page 37 for information on configuring the expansion output delay block).

Expansion Output Filter Block

Each expansion output contains a filter block. This block functions the same as the mic/line input filter block, except that there are 10 slots for filters (see Input Filter Block on page 26 for information on configuring expansion output filters).

Expansion Output Dynamics Block

Each expansion output contains a dynamics block. This block functions the same as the mic/line input dynamics blocks (see Input Dynamics Blocks on page 32 for information on configuring the expansion output dynamic filter).

Expansion Output Attenuation Block

Each expansion output contains an attenuation block. This block functions the same as the output attenuation block (see Output Attenuation Block on page 62 for information on configuring the expansion output dynamic filter).

Virtual Send Bus

The virtual send bus consists of mix points that allow inputs to be routed back to the virtual return input panel for additional mixing and processing (see Virtual Returns on page 48).

NOTE: Virtual Send Bus mix-points are highlighted in green.

Figure 119. Virtual Send Bus Mix Points

Virtual Send channels cannot be routed to themselves. For example, Virtual Return A may be routed to Virtual Return B via the virtual send bus, but Virtual Return A cannot be routed to itself via the virtual send bus, and so on (see figure 120 below).

Figure 120. Virtual Send Bus for Virtual Returns

Configuration Tools

This section contains information for configuring certain tools and options that are found under the Tools menu in DSP Configurator and covers the following topics:

• Presets • Firmware Loader
• Groups • Organize Building Blocks
  • Digital I/O • Device Settings
• Players - Options
  • Macros • Expansion Bus
  • Device Manager • Phone Dialer
• Connect to or Disconnect from Device

Presets

Preset options are available from the Tools menu.

Tools Window Help Presets: Current State Ready Presets... Configure Groups Configure Digital I/O ① Mark All Items Ctrl+A ② Save Preset ③ Clear Marked Items

Figure 121. Presets Options

① Mark All Items — Marks all gain blocks, processor blocks, and mix-points in the main workspace. Performing this function before saving a preset ensures every element in the workspace is saved to the preset.
② Save Preset — Saves the marked blocks and mix points of the current configuration as a preset. When Save Preset is clicked, the following dialog box opens saying that only the elements marked with a green outline are saved to the preset (see figure 122 below). This option is only available if items are marked.

DSP Configurator Only elements that you have highlighted, indicated by the green outline, will be saved in this preset. See Help file for more information. OK Cancel Do Not Show This Dialog

Figure 122. Preset Save Message

③ Clear Marked Items — Unmarks all currently marked elements.

Methods for Marking Items

Marked items are highlighted in green (see figure 123 below). There are four ways to mark items in DSP Configurator:

• Mark All — Press on the keyboard to mark all items in the main workspace.
• Mark Group — Click and drag the cursor to create a box around a group of items to mark them. Click and drag the cursor while holding the key to create box around another group of items to mark them while keeping previous group marked.
• Mark Series — Click the first item in the series to mark it, then press on the final item in the series. All items between the first and last items are marked.
• Mark Multiple Individual – Click the first item to mark it and press to mark additional items anywhere in the main workspace.

graph LR
    A["ANG GAIN"] --> B["FILT"]
    B --> C["REC"]
    C --> D["DYN"]
    D --> E["DYN"]
    E --> F["DELY"]
    F --> G["DUCK"]
    G --> H["AM"]
    H --> I["GAIN"]

Figure 123. Marked Items Highlighted in Green

Configuring Presets

1. Create a configuration to be saved as a preset (see DSP Configurator Software on page 10).
2. Mark the items that will be included in the preset.
3. Select Tools > Presets > Save Preset.
4. From the Save a Preset dialog box, enter the preset number (1 through 32) in the Preset Number field (see figure 124, ① below). Preset slots that do not already have a preset assigned read [unassigned]. Enter a name into the Preset Name field (②, 12 character maximum).
5. Click OK (③) to save the preset.

Save a Preset Select a preset number. In the Preset name box, unused presets are named "unassigned". To create a new preset, select an unused preset number and, if desired, type a new name. Otherwise, a default name will be assigned. To overwrite an existing preset, select a preset with a name other than "unassigned." Accept the current name or type a new one, then click OK. Preset Number: Preset Name: Lecture Hall (12 Chain Max) OK Cancel

Figure 124. Save a Preset Dialog Box

NOTE: When a configuration file is pushed to a DMP 128 Plus, presets contained within that file are available for recall from DSP Configurator or SIS commands.

1. The preset is saved and is available from the Presets drop-down menu at the top of the main workspace.

Presets: Current Emulation Current Emulation 1- Lecture Hall

Figure 125. Presets Drop-Down

Groups

Groups allow master control of Gain, Mute, Bass, Treble, and Loudness for groups of channels. Groups are used in macros, ACP panels, and other control configurations.

Click Tools > Configure Groups to open the Configure Groups dialog box.

Configure Groups 1 Select Group: 1. 2 Select Control Type: Gain Mx-point Mic/Line Input Gain Pre-mixer Gain Virtual Return Gain Output Attenuation Post-mixer Trim Mute Mx-point Mic/Line Input Gain Pre-mixer Gain Virtual Return Gain Output Attenuation Available Group Members: Input 1 (Input#1) Input 2 (Input#2) Input 3 (Input#3) Input 4 (Input#4) Input 5 (Input#5) Input 6 (Input#6) Input 7 (Input#7) Input 8 (Input#8) Input 9 (Input#9) Input 10 (Input#10) Input 11 (Input#11) Input 12 (Input#12) 6 Delete Current Group Apply Close

① Select Group

⑤ Apply Button

② Select Control Type

⑥ Delete Current Group Button

③ Available Group Members

⑦ Close Button

④ Change Name Button

Figure 126. Group Controls Dialog Box

① Select Group — Provides a drop-down menu to select the number of the group to be configured. If the group has been configured and named, the group name appears next to the group number. If the group slot is empty, it reads next to the group number. There are 64 group slots available.
② Select Control Type — Group controls can manage Gain, Mute, Bass, or Treble for the specified inputs, mix-points, or outputs. From the Select Control Type panel, select the type of control from the Gain, Mute, Bass, or Treble lists.

NOTE: Bass and Treble are only available if the Bass and Treble filters are inserted on a channel and only allow channels with the filters to be placed in a group.

③ Available Group Members — This section populates according to the selected control type and lists all inputs, mix-points, and outputs available to be added as group members. Check the box next to a member to add it to the group. Group members must be the same control type. The maximum number of group members for a single group is 128.

NOTE: Loudness processors can be selected from input and output gain stages.

④ Change Name Button — Once a group has been created, select it from the Select Group drop-down menu (1), click Change Name to change the name of the selected group.
⑤ Apply Button — Click Apply after changes to a group have been made. The Confirm Group Details dialog box opens allowing the group name and number to be edited. Click OK to apply group changes.
⑥ Delete Current Group Button — Select a group from the Select Group drop-down menu and click Delete Current Group to delete the group.
⑦ Close Button — Click Close to close the dialog box. Any changes that have not been applied will be lost.

Configuring Groups

To create a new group:

1. Select Tools > Configure Groups to open the Configure Groups dialog box.
2. From the Select Group drop-down, select a group slot to configure (see figure 127, ① below).
3. From the Select Control Type panel (②), expand a control type.
4. Choose which gain stage the control type affects.
5. From the Available Group Members panel, select the channels to be configured as group members (③).
6. Click Apply ( 4).

Configure Groups 1 Select Group: 1. Change Name 2 Select Control Type: Gain Mix-point Mic/Line Input Gain Pre-mixer Gain Virtual Return Gain Output Attenuation Post-mixer Trim Mute Bass Treble Available Group Members: Output #1 (Output#1) Output #2 (Output#2) Output #3 (Output#3) Output #4 (Output#4) Output #5 (Output#5) Output #6 (Output#6) Output #7 (Output#7) Output #8 (Output#8) Aux Out #1 (Output#9) Aux Out #2 (Output#10) Aux Out #3 (Output#11) Aux Out #4 (Output#12) ... Delete Current Group Apply Close

Figure 127. Configure Groups Dialog Box

1. Confirm the group number and name from the Confirm Group Details dialog box (see figure 128, 5 below).
2. Click OK to confirm all details and create the group (6).

Confirm Group Details Group # 1 Program Out OK Cancel

Figure 128. Confirm Group Details Dialog Box

To edit an existing group:

1. Select Tools > Configure Groups to open the Configure Groups dialog box (see figure 129 below).
2. From the Select Group drop-down (figure 129, ① below), select an existing group to edit.
3. From the Select Control Type panel (②), expand a control type.
4. Choose which gain stage to edit.
5. From the Available Group Members panel (③), select or deselect channels that will be members of the group.
6. Click Apply ( 4).
7. From the Confirm Group Details dialog box, the group number and group name can be edited (5).
8. Click OK to confirm the group details (6).
9. When the Overwrite Group dialog box opens, click OK to confirm the changes made to the group.

To edit only a group name or group number:

1. Choose the group from the Select Group drop-down (①).
2. Click Change Name (7).

3. From the Change Group Name dialog box, enter the new group number or group name into the respective fields (5).

4. Click OK (6).

Configure Groups 1 Select Group: 1 Table Mics 2 Select Control Type: 3 Available Group Members: Gain Mix-point Mic/Line Input Gain Pre-mixer Gain Virtual Return Gain Output Attenuation Post-mixer Trim Mute Input #1 (Input#1) Input #2 (Input#2) Input #3 (Input#3) Input #4 (Input#4) Input #5 (Input#5) Input #6 (Input#6) Input #7 (Input#7) Input #8 (Input#8) Input #9 (Input#9) Input #10 (Input#10) Input #11 (Input#11) Input #12 (Input#12) Aux h #1 (Input#13) Delete Current Group Apply Close

Confirm Group Details 5 Group # 1 Table Mics 6 OK Cancel

Figure 129. Editing a Group

Digital I/O

The DMP 128 Plus rear panel has eight sets of digital I/O ports (see figure 2, B on page 5). Each set has one digital input and two digital outputs. These digital I/O ports can be configured from DSP Configurator. The Configure Digital I/O dialog box allows the user to select from a list of actions, then have the script complied and implemented on the device.

Each of the digital I/O sets has three panels for configuration. One panel for Digital In and two for Digital Out. The Digital In panel contains a drop-down for the action and a drop-down for the element being acted upon. Digital Out 1 and Digital Out 2 contain drop-down menus for the mode and the input being acted upon.

Click Tools > Configure Digital I/O to open the Configure Digital I/O dialog box.

Configure Digital V/D V/O #1 V/O #2 V/O #3 V/O #4 V/O #5 V/O #6 V/O #7 V/O #8 Digital In Action: Level Tupper - Low N Acting upon: Input #1 Digital In Action: No action/off Acting upon: Digital In Action: No action/off Acting upon: Digital In Action: No action/off Acting upon: Digital In Action: No action/off Acting upon: Digital In Action: No action/off Acting upon: Digital Out 1 Mode: Group Minute High Acting upon: Group #1 Digital Out 1 Mode: Output Always High Acting upon: Digital Out 1 Mode: Output Always High Acting upon: Digital Out 1 Mode: Output Always High Acting upon: Digital Out 1 Mode: Output Always High Acting upon: Digital Out 1 Mode: Output Always High Acting upon: Digital Out 1 Mode: Output Always High Acting upon: Digital Out 2 Mode: Group Minute High Acting upon: Group #2 Digital Out 2 Mode: Output Always High Acting upon: Digital Out 2 Mode: Output Always High Acting upon: Digital Out 2 Mode: Output Always High Acting upon: Digital Out 2 Mode: Output Always High Acting upon: Digital Out 2 Mode: Output Always High Acting upon: Digital Out 2 Mode: Output Always High Acting upon: Digital Out 2 Mode: Output Always High Acting upon: Reset All Close

① Digital In Panel

④ Reset All Button

② Digital Out 1 Panel

⑤ Close Button

③ Digital Out 2 Panel

Figure 130. Configure Digital I/O Dialog Box

① Digital In Panel — Provides the following configuration options for the digital input.

a. Status LED — Displays the current status of the digital input. When the input is high, the LED lights green. When the input is low, the LED is black. When DSP Configurator is in Emulate mode, the LED is gray.
b. Action Drop-Down — Provides a list of actions for the digital input to trigger, depending on the status of the digital input.
c. Acting Upon Drop-Down — Provides a list of inputs, groups, macros, and presets for the action to affect.

② Digital Out 1 Panel — Provides the following configuration options for the digital output.

a. Mode Drop-Down — Provides a list of modes for the first digital output.
b. Acting Upon Drop-Down — Provides a list of inputs, groups, macros, and presets for the mode to affect.

③ Digital Out 2 Panel — Contains drop-downs identical to Digital Out 1 panel for configuring Digital Out 2.
④ Reset All Button — Resets all I/O configuration data to default.
⑤ Close Button — Closes the dialog box, retaining the configuration data.

Configuring Digital I/O

1. In the Digital In panel, select an action from the Action drop-down.

I/O #1 I/O #2 Digital In Action: No action/off Digital In Action: No action/off No action/off Level Trigger - Low Mutes Level Trigger - High Mutes Edge Trigger - Hght to Low Mutes: Low to High Unmutes Edge Trigger - Hght to Low Unmutes: Low to High Mutes Toggle Trigger - High to Low toggles Mute Toggle Trigger - Low to High toggles Mute Level Trigger - Low Mutes Group Level Trigger - High Mutes Group Edge Trigger - Hght to Low Mutes Group; Low to High Unmutes Group Edge Trigger - Hght to Low Unmutes Group; Low to High Mutes Group Toggle Trigger - High to Low toggles Group Mute Toggle Trigger - Low to High toggles Group Mute Edge Trigger - Hght to Low Runs Macro Edge Trigger - Low to High Runs Macro Edge Trigger - Hght to Low Recalls Preset Edge Trigger - Low to High Recalls Preset

Figure 131. Selecting Digital In Action

1. From the Acting upon drop-down, select the input, group, preset, or macro affected by the action.

Acting upon: Select an Input Select an Input Input #1 Input #2 Input #3 Input #4 Input #5 Input #6 Input #7 Input #8 Input #9 Input #10 Input #11 Input #12

Figure 132. Selecting Digital In Acting Upon

1. From the Digital Out 1 panel, select a mode for the digital output from the Mode drop-down.

Digital Out 1 Mode: Output Always High Output Always High Output Always Low Mute High Unmute High Group Muts High Group Unmute High Macro Stated Set High Once (Blink) Macro Stated Set Low Once (Blink) Preset Focalled Set High Once (Blink) Preset Pecalled Set Low Once (Blink) Automix Gate On (>1024) Set High Automix Gate On (>1024) Set Low Signal Presence (>40 dBFS) Set High Signal Presence (>40 dBFS) Set Low

Figure 133. Selecting Digital Out 1 Mode

1. From the Digital Out 1 Acting upon drop-down, select an input, group, preset, or macro affected by the mode.

Digital Out 1 Mode: Group Unmute High Acting upon: Select a Group Select a Group Group #1 Group #2 Group #3 Group #4 Group #5 Group #6 Group #7 Group #8 Group #9 Group #10 Group #11 Group #12 Group #13 Group #14 Group #15 Group #16 Group #17 Group #18 Group #19 Group #20 Group #21 Group #22 Group #23 Group #24 Group #25 Group #26 Group #27 Group #28 Group #29

Figure 134. Selecting Digital Out 1 Acting Upon

1. From the Digital Out 2 panel, select a mode for the digital output from the Mode drop-down.
2. From the Digital Out 2 Acting upon drop-down, select the input, group, preset, or macro affected by the mode.
3. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for additional Digital I/O configurations.
4. Click Close to close the Configure Digital I/O dialog box.
5. To save the Digital I/O configuration, click File > Save or press and choose a location to save the configuration file.

To push the Digital I/O configuration to a DMP 128 Plus:

1. Connect to a DMP 128 Plus in Live mode (see Live and Emulate Panel on page 18) and follow the Digital I/O configurations steps listed starting on page 73. Changes made in the Configure Digital I/O dialog box when connected Live are applied directly to the DMP 128 Plus.

-or-

1. Follow the Digital I/O configuration steps listed starting on page 73 while in Emulate mode.
2. Connect to a DMP 128 Plus in Live mode and perform a configuration file push (see Live and Emulate Panel on page 18).

Players

The Configure Players dialog box allows the user to upload audio files to a DMP 128 Plus and is available when connected Live to the device. Once the audio file is uploaded, it may be assigned to one of eight players. Configured players may then be assigned to any of the Aux inputs and routed to the desired output for audio file playback (see Aux Inputs on page 43).

Configure Players File in the device: Byte Left: 97MB FileName Size (KB) inknake.wav_ConvertedByDSP... $55 sinewave.wav_ConvertedByDSP... $55 whitenoise.wav_ConvertedByDSP... $55 Add File to Device Remove File from Device Players (drag File to Player to Assign): No. Filename Status Repeat Repeat Delay 1 [unassigned] 0 2 [unassigned] 0 3 [unassigned] 0 4 [unassigned] 0 5 [unassigned] 0 6 [unassigned] 0 7 [unassigned] 0 8 [unassigned] 0 Sold Players Stop Player Clear Player

① Files in the Device

② Add File to Device Button

③ Remove File from Device Button

4 Players

Figure 135. Configure Players Dialog Box

⑤ Start Player Button

⑥ Stop Player Button

⑦ Clear Player Button

① Files in the Device — Lists the audio files stored on the DMP 128 Plus. The file names and extensions are listed in the Filename column, with the size of the file listed in the Size (KB) column.

NOTE: Default files in the device are white noise, pink noise, and sine wave.

② Add File to Device Button — Opens the Select Audio file to load to device dialog box where an audio file is selected to load onto the DMP 128 Plus.

NOTES:

• Only .wav, .mp3, .wma, .aiff, .aac, and .raw audio file types are accepted.
• All audio files are converted to .raw at a 48 kHz sampling rate when uploaded to the DMP 128 Plus.
• File names containing spaces are not accepted.

③ Remove File from Device Button — Removes the selected file from the device.
4 Players — Contains 8 players that can have audio files assigned to them. Each player contains a Repeat check box that repeats the audio file until Stop Player is selected. The Repeat Delay field specifies the number of seconds between each repeat of the audio file. To assign an audio file from the device to one of the 8 players, click and drag the desired audio file to the desired player. The filename of the player changes from [unassigned] to the name of the file assigned to the player.
⑤ Start Player Button — Starts playing the audio file assigned to the selected player.

NOTE: This button is only available when the player is inserted into the Aux input (see Aux Inputs on page 43 for more information).

⑥ Stop Player Button — Stops playing the audio file assigned to the selected player.
⑦ Clear Player Button — Removes the assigned audio file from the selected player, but does not remove it from the device. Player reverts to [unassigned].

Configuring Players

To upload an audio file:

1. Enter Live mode to connect to a DMP 128 Plus (see Live and Emulate Panel on page 18).
2. Click Tools > Configure Players.
3. From the Configure Players dialog box, click Add File to Device (see figure 135, ② on the previous page).
4. From the Select Audio file to load to device dialog box, locate the desired audio file and select it (see figure 136, ① below).

NOTE: File names containing spaces are not accepted.

1. Click Open (②).

Select Audio files to lead to devices: Main User Files > Downloads Organize > New Folder Favorites Creative Cloud Files Desktop Downloads Recent Places Libraries Computer Local Link (C) 1 2 File name: pinkmonseuser Name Title Contributing statics Album pinkmonseuser shihenoseuser iWAV/MP3/WMA/AEFS 2 Open Cancel

Figure 136. Selecting an Audio File to Upload

1. A Loading... status bar appears in the menu status field at the top of the main workspace. When the file is loaded successfully, the field reads File Loaded Successfully!

Loading... File Uploaded Successfully!

Figure 137. Loading Bar and File Uploaded Successfully

1. Click OK in the Upload Complete dialog box.

Upload Complete The file has been uploaded to your device successfully. OK

Figure 138. Upload Complete Dialog Box

To assign an audio file to a player:

1. Select the audio file from the Files in the device panel.
2. Click and drag the audio file to the desired player (pinknoise.wav is being assigned to Player 1 in figure 139 below).
3. When the file has been assigned to a player, the player Filename field displays the name of the audio file assigned.

Configure Players Files in the device: Bytes Left: 95MB Filename Size (KB) pinknoise.wav ConvertedByDSP... 953 Add File to Device Remove File from Device Players (drag file to Player to Assign): No. Filename Status Repeat Repeat Delay 1 [unassigned] 0 2 [unassigned] 0 3 [unassigned] 0 4 [unassigned] 0 5 [unassigned] 0 6 [unassigned] 0 7 [unassigned] 0 8 [unassigned] 0 Start Player Stop Player Clear Player

Figure 139. Assigning Audio File to Players

To start, stop, or clear a player:

1. Click a player with an audio file assigned to it (see figure 140, ① below).
2. Check the Repeat checkbox (②) to repeat the audio file after it has been played (optional).
3. Enter the amount of time in seconds the player should wait before repeating the file in the Repeat Delay field ( ③) (optional).
4. Click Start Player ( 4).

NOTE: The player must be assigned to an Aux input before Start Player and Stop Player are available (see Aux Input Gain Block on page 44).

1. To stop the player, highlight the player with a single click, then click Stop Player ( ⑤).
2. To clear the player of its audio file, highlight the player with a single click, then click Clear Player ( ⑥).

Configure Players Files in the device: Bytes Left: 98MB Filename Size (KB) pinknoise_way_ConvertedByDSP_ 959 No. Filename Status Repeat Repeat Delay 1 pinknoise.wav_ Stopped ✓ 0 2 [unassigned] 3 [unassigned] 4 [unassigned] 5 [unassigned] 6 [unassigned] 7 [unassigned] 8 [unassigned] Add File to Device Remove File from Device Start Player Stop Player Clear Player

Figure 140. Starting, Stopping, and Clearing Players

Macros

Macros are sets of actions that can affect the local DMP 128 Plus and other Extron products on the same TCP/IP network. They can be configured in Emulate or Live mode via an Ethernet connection only, and they can be saved to a configuration file or pushed to DMP 128 Plus internal memory. Macros are comprised of up to 32 actions that occur in sequence to quickly configure a system for specific applications.

Configure Macros ① Select Macro: 1. Macro 1° Change Name ② Power-on Macro: Select ③ Destination Action Selection 1 Selection 2 Selection 3 Selection 4 Next Command Delay Local Select Action Execute immedi 0.000 (f) Delete Current Macro Clone Macro Run Macro Edit Remote Destination ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑩ Push Macro to Device Close

Figure 141. Configure Macros Dialog Box

① Select Macro Drop-Down — Select an empty macro slot to configure or select an existing macro to edit from this drop-down menu.
② Change Name Button — Click this button to enter a new name for a previously configured macro. Press to confirm the macro name change.
③ Macro Configuration Form — Up to 32 actions can be configured in this form. When one action is configured, a new line appears to configure the next action in the macro.
④ Delete Current Macro Button — Deletes the macro currently selected from the Select Macro drop-down.
⑤ Clone Macro Button — Clones the currently selected macro to a new macro slot.
⑥ Run Macro Button — Runs the macro currently selected from Select Macro drop-down, performing all of the configured actions in sequential order. This is only available when connected to a DMP 128 Plus in Live mode via the LAN or VOIP 1 port.
⑦ Edit Remote Destinations Button — Opens the dialog box to edit data for remote devices being configured by the actions in a macro. Remote devices in the network can also be added from this dialog box (see the Configure Macros topic in the DSP Configurator Help file). This is only available when connected in Live mode.
⑧ Push Macros to Device Button — Pushes all macros to a connected DMP 128 Plus. Once the macros are on the device, they can be run by control systems or DSP Configurator. This button is only available when connected Live to a DMP 128 Plus (see Live and Emulate Panel on page 18).
⑨ Power-on Macro Drop-Down — Select an existing macro to run whenever the DMP 128 Plus is powered on.
10 Close Button — Closes the Configure Macros dialog box, retaining macros that have been created or edited. Actions that have not been completely configured show a symbol to the left of the Destination field in the macro configuration form. Actions showing the Symbol are not saved when the dialog box is closed.

Configuring a Macro

1. Click Tools > Configure Macros. The Configure Macros dialog box opens.
2. Select an empty macro slot from the Select Macro drop-down.
3. From the Destination drop-down, select a destination for the macro action. Choose Local for the local DMP 128 Plus, or Add Destination... for a remote destination. If choosing Local, proceed to step 4.

NOTE: Macro commands can only be sent to remote destinations via the LAN/VoIP 1 port (V models only).

a. After selecting Add Destination..., the Edit Remote Destinations dialog box opens.
b. Complete the form in the dialog box, including username and password, if required.
c. Select Apply to add the device to the drop-down in the Destinations column.
d. Click Close to close the Edit Remote Destinations dialog box.
e. Select the newly created remote destination from the Destination drop-down.

1. From the Action drop-down, select an action to be configured.

2. Recall Preset — Recall an existing preset.

3. Set Group Gain — Set the level of an existing gain group.
4. Group Gain Inc/Dec — Set the increment/decrement values of an existing gain group.
5. Set Group Mute — Mute or unmute an existing mute group.
6. Gain — Set the gain of a specific gain block on a specific channel.
7. Mute — Mute or unmute a specific gain block on a specific channel.
8. Set Phantom Power – Enable or disable phantom power on a specific Mic/Line input channel.
9. Meters On/Off — Enable or disable level meters at the input gain or output attenuation stages of a specific channel.

- Start Player — Starts a selected player.

- Stop Player — Stops a selected player.

- SIS Command — Type in a single SIS command to perform an action not listed above (see Remote Communication and Control on page 123).

NOTE: Use the w key in place of Esc and the | (pipe) key in place of ←.

- Set Input Format — Specify whether mic/line inputs receive analog signal from the inputs or digital signal via the Dante network (see 9 in figure 45 on page 25).

- Dial Number — Use a specific VoIP line to dial a string.

- Dial Digits — Use a specific VoIP line and line appearance to dial a predetermined number, such as an extronsion number or conference pin.

• End Call — End calls on a specific line or all appearances of a VoIP line.

1. Once the action is chosen, up to four additional selections are made available. These additional selections must be completed in order to proceed to the next macro step. For example, if Set Group Gain is the selected action, Selection 1 prompts the selection of a gain group to be affected and Selection 2 determines the gain level of the selected group.

2. When all of the action selections are configured, a new line appears at the bottom of the form so another action can be configured.

3. From the Next Command drop-down, select whether the DMP 128 Plus waits for an SIS response from each action before executing the next action in the macro or executes the next command immediately without waiting for an SIS response. The default is Execute immediately. Responses can be viewed through Extron Dataviewer and follow SIS response syntax (see DSP SIS Commands on page 141).

a. Use the the Delay field to enter the amount of delay in seconds. The default is 0.000 seconds of delay.

1. Click Change Name at the top of the dialog box and enter a new name for the macro in the Select Macro text field. Default macro names are Macro 1, Macro 2, and so on.

2. Up to 32 actions can be configured per macro. Follow steps 3 through 7 to configure additional actions. Right click the left-most field in an action to cut, copy, or paste actions in a macro.

3. Connect Live to the DMP 128 Plus and click Push Macro to Device to push it to the DMP 128 Plus. Once the macro has been pushed, it can be run via DSP Configurator, a control system, or SIS commands.

NOTES:

• A macro cannot be run until it is pushed to the device. Edits made to an existing macro must also be pushed to the device.
• Macro configuration data is saved on a per-line basis. When an action is completely configured, the data is saved even if the Configure Macros dialog box is closed.
• Macro configurations are saved when the DSP Configurator configuration file is saved.
• If DSP Configurator is closed without saving the configuration file or pushing the macro to a DMP 128 Plus, unsaved macro configuration data is deleted.

To delete a Macro:

1. Click Tools > Configure Macros.
2. From the Select Macro drop-down, choose the macro to be deleted.
3. Once the macro information is displayed, click Delete Current Macro in the bottom left corner of the Configure Macros dialog box.

To clone a Macro:

1. Click Tools>Configure Macros.
2. From the Select Macro drop-down, choose the macro to be cloned.
3. Click Clone Macro at the bottom of the Configure Macros dialog box.
4. Use the drop-down in the Clone Macro dialog to select a destination for the cloned macro. By default, the next empty macro slot is selected as the destination.

NOTE: If a macro already exists in the selected destination, a warning message appears below the drop-down, warning that the existing macro will be overwritten with the cloned macro.

1. Click OK to clone the macro or Cancel to cancel the action.
2. After the macro is cloned, the new macro is displayed in the Configure Macros dialog box. The cloned macro has a default macro name.

To run a Macro:

1. Connect to the DMP 128 Plus in Live mode (see Live and Emulate Panel on page 18).
2. Click Tools > Configure Macros.
3. From the Select Macro drop-down, choose the macro to be run.
4. Once the macro information is displayed, click Run Macro.

-or-

1. Connect to the DMP 128 Plus in Live mode (see Live and Emulate Panel on page 18).
2. Select the macro to be run from the Run Macro drop-down in the tool bar.

Run Macro Run Macro 1. Lecture Hall

Figure 142. Run Macro Drop-Down

To edit remote destinations:

1. Click Edit Remote Destinations from the Configure Macros dialog box.
2. Select an existing device from the Unique Device Name drop-down.
3. Edit the information for the device or click Delete to remove the selected device.
4. Click Apply to save changes made to the remote destination.
5. Click Close to close the Edit Remote Destinations dialog box.

NOTE: See step 3 on page 79 for information regarding adding a destination.

Manipulating Macro Actions

After a macro action has been fully configured, it can be cut, copied, pasted, inserted, or deleted. Right-click the left-most box in the action line item (see figure 141, ③ on page 78) and select an option from the drop-down menu.

Destination Cut Copy Paste Insert Delete

Figure 143. Macro Action Manipulation Drop-Down

To cut a macro action:

1. Right click the box furthest to the left in the action list item to be cut.
2. Select Cut. The action is removed from the list and placed in the clipboard.

To copy a macro action:

1. Right click the box furthest to the left in the action list item to be copied.
2. Select Copy. The action is copied to the clipboard.

To paste a macro action:

1. Right click the box furthest to the left in the action list item where the action is to be pasted.
2. Select Paste. The action is copied to the list item. Any existing action data is overwritten.

To insert a macro action:

1. Cut or copy a macro action to be inserted.
2. Right click the box furthest to left in the action list item directly below where the action in the clipboard is to be inserted.
3. Select Insert. The action is inserted from the clipboard above the action that was right clicked in step 1.

To delete a macro action:

1. Right click the box furthest to the left in the action to be deleted.
2. Click Delete.

Device Manager

Device Manager is used to configure and switch between multiple devices in Live or Emulate mode within DSP Configurator (see Live and Emulate Panel on page 18).

Devices can be placed and ordered in user-created folders for easily tracking systems with devices across multiple rooms. When Device Manager contains multiple devices, all device configurations are saved in a single DSP Configurator file.

Select Tools > Device Manager to open the Device Manager dialog box.

Device Manager Lecture Hall DMP 128 Plus (DMP-128-Plus-ED-00-18): 10.113. DMP 128 Plus C AT (DMP 128 Plus C AT) AXP 50 C AT (AXP 50 C AT) DTP CrossPoint 108 4K IPCP MA 70 (DTP CrossP Training Room DMP 128 Plus C (DMP 128 Plus C) DTP CrossPoint 84 IPCP MA 70 (DTP CrossPoint 8

① Add Device Button
② Clone Device Button
③ Remove Device Button
④ Expand and Collapse All Buttons
⑤ New Folder Button
⑥ Device List Panel

Figure 144. Device Manager Dialog Box

① Add Device Button — Click the button to open the DSP Configurator splash screen to select another device to be configured. As a device is chosen or connected, it is added to the Device Manager dialog box.

2 Clone Device Button —Click the button to clone the currently selected device. When a device is cloned, information within the device configuration file is also cloned.

NOTE: If Live mode is enabled, a backup may need to be performed before the device can be successfully cloned.

3 Remove Device Button — Click the button to remove the currently selected device from the device manager. Select a folder and click this button to delete the folder and all devices it contains.
4 Expand and Collapse All Buttons — Click the icon to expand all folders and show the devices it contains. Click the to collapse all folders.
5 New Folder Button — Click the button to create a new folder to drag a device into.
6 Device List Panel — Lists the devices and folders in Live and Emulate mode. From this panel, devices can be clicked and dragged into folders, placed in custom order, and folders can be renamed. If the device is connected via LAN, the device IP is displayed. Double-clicking a device in this list will initiate a pull (see Connect to a DMP 128 Plus in Live Mode on page 18).

The color of the icon next to a device name indicates Live or Emulate status, as well as whether the device is configured as a Primary or Secondary EXP device. Devices with color icons are in Live mode. Devices with grayed icons are in Emulate mode. Devices with blue icons are configured as Secondary units (see Expansion Bus on page 94).

Managing Devices in Device Manager

To add a device:

1. Click Tools > Device Manager to open the Device Manager dialog box.
2. Click the Add Device button (see figure 145, ① below).

Device Manager DMP 128 Plus (DMF-128Plus-ED-00-18_10_113.113)

Figure 145. Adding a Device

1. From the DSP Configurator splash screen drop-down, select the device to be added to Device Manager (see figure 146, ② below). Select Connect... to open the Connect to device... dialog box and directly connect with a device. When connecting directly, DSP Configurator performs a pull of the newly connected device configuration.

2. Click OK (③).

Extron® DSP Configurator Select the type of device you would to configure. OK Cancel Loading.

Figure 146. Selecting a Device to be Added

To arrange devices into a folder:

1. From the Device Manager dialog box, click the New Folder button (see figure 147, ① below).

2. Enter a name for the folder. The text for the folder name is automatically highlighted and ready to be edited (②).

NOTE: Folders can be renamed later by clicking twice on the folder name and editing the text.

1. Press .

2. Click and drag devices over the folder name and release to insert the devices into a folder (3).

Device Manager DMP 128 Plus (DMP-128-Plus-ED-00-18): 10.113.113. DTP CrossPoint 108 4K IPCP NA 70 (DTP CrossPoint lecture Hall)

Device Manager DMP 128 Plus (DMF-128-Plus-ED-0G-18): 10.113.113.72 DTP CrossPoint 108 4K IPCF MA 70 (DTP CrossPoint Lecture Hall

Figure 147. Arranging Devices Into a Folder

Connect to or Disconnect from Device

When DSP Configurator is in Emulate mode, this selection in the Tools menu reads Connect to Device and opens the Connect to device... dialog box when selected. When DSP Configurator is in Live mode and connected to a device, this selection reads Disconnect from Device and disconnects DSP Configurator from the current device when selected, and returns to Emulate mode.

For detailed instructions on connecting to a DMP 128 Plus see Connect to a DMP 128 Plus in Live Mode on page 18. For detailed instructions on disconnecting from a DMP 128 Plus see Exit Live Mode and Enter Emulate Mode on page 20.

Firmware Loader

Select Tools > Firmware Loader to open the Extron Firmware Loader software from DSP Configurator. Firmware Loader assists users in updating firmware or uploading new firmware to devices via RS-232, USB, or TCP/IP connection. Refer to the Firmware Loader Help file for more information in using the Firmware Loader software.

NOTES:

• Extron Firmware Loader software must be installed on the host PC in order for it to be opened.
• TCP/IP connection is recommended for updating firmware.

Downloading Firmware Updates

1. Go to www.extron.com and click the Download tab at the top of the page (see figure 148, ① below).
2. From the Download page, select the Firmware link (②) near the middle of the page.

Extron Electronics INTERFACING, SWITCHING AND CONTROL Log out Order Support: 000.633.9873 S2 Support Inventory: 000.633.9876 Control Systems Support Inventory: 000.633.9877 Products Training Markets Tech Library Company Download Extron Insider Download Home Software Center Controller DSP Configurator Software Global Configurator Global Configurator Professional GUI Configurator GUI Designer IP Intercom HelpDesk Software PCS XTP System Configuration Software Control System Drivers Finware HIO Modules Resources GUI Design Resources TouchLink Touchpanel Thesis Architectural Design Resources Download Extron Resources Popular Software GUI Design Resources Control system design tools for your Touchlink project DSP Configurator Software DSP Application Software

Figure 148. Download Page and Firmware Link

1. The Firmware link opens the firmware Download Center page. Click the D from the alphabet list at the top of the page (see figure 149, ③ below).
2. Select the Download link (④) at the right side of the DMP 128 Plus listing.

Extron Electronics INTERPACING, SWITCHING AND CONTROL Log in: 1. Sign up S3 Support Hotline [phone] Products Training Tools Tech Library Company Download Download Home Software Dents Controllers DGP Configurator Software Global Configurator Global Configurator Professional GUI Configurator GUI Designer IP Monitor Help/Cost Software PCS ATP System Configuration Software Control System Drivers Hardware HID Modules Download Center Firmware (168 files) ALL # A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Archives Please consult Release Notes for important compatibility information and history. Description Part Number Version Date Size DMP 128 Updated 40-175-50 1.10 Dec. 12, 2016 4.0 Mb Download Firmware for DMP 128 Release Notes

Figure 149. Download Center and Firmware Link

1. After clicking the Download link, select Run from the next page to run the firmware installer (see figure 150, ⑤ below). Alternatively, select Save (⑥) to save the firmware installer and install the firmware at a later time.

Download Home Software Domic Controller DGP Configurator Softwares Global Configurator Global Configurator Professional GUI Configurator GUI Designer IP Telecom Help/Desk Softwares PCS XTR System Configuration Software Control System Drivers Firmware MID Module Resources GUI Design Resources TouchLine Touchpanel Thomas Architecture Design Resources Download Center Currently downloading DMP128_Plus_FW_v1x00.exe. If your download does not automatically start, click here. Subscribe to receive an e-mail notification when DMP 128 Plus is updated. Manage your preferences and subscriptions Back Do you want to run or save DMP128_Plus_FW_v1x00.exe (66.5 MB) from extranu.com? This type of file could harm your computer. Run Save Cancel

Figure 150. Firmware Installer Run or Save

NOTE: When firmware is version 1.01.0010 or higher, the firmware cannot be downgraded to a version lower than 1.01.0010.

1. Once the installer has been run, the Firmware Upgrade dialog box opens, click Next to begin the installation process (see figure 151, ⑥ below).

Firmware Upgrade - InstallShield Wizard Extron. Firmware Upgrade Welcome to the Extron Installation Program for the DMP 128 Plus Firmware Upgrade v1.08 The Extron Installation Program will install the upgraded firmware on your computer. To continue, click Next. < Back Next > Cancel

Figure 151. Firmware Upgrade InstallShield

1. The terms of installation must be agreed to. Select the I accept... radio button (see figure 152, ⑦ below).

2. Click Next ( ⑧).

Firmware Upgrade - InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Firmware Upgrade EXTRON® ELECTRONICS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Carefully read the following agreement. This End User License Agreement is a legal agreement between the End user and Extron. THE END USER AGREES TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT BY INSTALLING. COPYING, OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE. IF THE END USER DOES NOT AGREE, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR USE THE SOFTWARE. Note: If the End User does not own the product for which this Software is intended, the End User is not authorized to install, copy, or otherwise use the software. DEFINITIONS Throughout this entire Agreement: "Extron" shall indicate FIGB Systems, Inc., DBA Extron® Electronics. I accept the terms of the license agreement I do not accept the terms of the license agreement InstallShield < Back Next > Cancel

Figure 152. Firmware License Agreement

1. An installation status dialog box opens that displays the completion status of firmware download and installation.

2. When the firmware is installed, the Firmware Upgrade dialog box displays that the installation is complete and the install location of the firmware file. By default, firmware is installed in:

Program Files > Extron > Firmware > DMP_128_Plus > vx.xx

If the View Firmware Release Notes checkbox is checked (see figure 153, ⑨ below), a PDF of the firmware release notes opens automatically. The box is checked by default.

Click Finish to close the dialog box (10).

Firmware Upgrade - InstallShield Wizard Extron. Firmware Update The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed the Firmware Update. The update instructions can be found at C:\Program Files\x86\xEpsilon\Firmware\DMP_128\v1.09 View Firmware Release Notes (Adobe Reader Required) Click Finish to exit the Wizard. Firmware Upgrade < Back Finish Cancel

Figure 153. Firmware Installed Dialog Box

Organize Building Blocks

Extron building blocks are a quick configuration tool that can significantly reduce configuration time. A building block is a collection of processor and gain settings for an input or output processing chain. Building blocks have been built by Extron based on extensive use and testing with each intended application or specific device. The Organize Building Blocks dialog box allows users to organize building blocks to their preference, import new building blocks, export existing building blocks, delete building blocks, and restore default building blocks that may have been deleted by the user. Building blocks in the Organize Building Blocks dialog are organized into folders for easily locating building blocks for a multitude of applications.

Select Tools > Organize Building Blocks to open the Organize Building Blocks dialog box.

Organize Building Blocks ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ Mic/Line + Table Mic -Boundary + Table Mic - Gooseneck + Lectem Mic - Gooseneck + Ceiling Mic + Handheld Mic Computer Sound Card VCR/DVD Combo iPod DVD Player Pro Level CD/DVD Player (balanced) Wireless Mic Rx (unbal) Wireless Mic Rx (balanced) Telephone RX

① Export Building Blocks File Button

④ Restore Default Building Blocks Button

② Import Building Blocks File Button

⑤ New Folder Button

③ Delete Building Block Button

⑥ Building Blocks Panel

Figure 154. Organize Building Blocks Dialog Box

① Export Building Blocks File Button — Click the button to export the selected building block file to be saved to a disk.

NOTE: Building block files have an XML extension.

② Import Building Blocks File Button — Click the "button" to browse the computer for building block files to import to DSP Configurator.

③ Delete Building Block Button — Click the "button" to delete the currently selected building block.

4 Restore Default Building Blocks Button — If default building blocks that come installed with DSP Configurator are deleted, click the button to restore them.

NOTE: Only the default building blocks can be restored with this function. User created building blocks are not restored if deleted.

TIP: To avoid accidentally deleting user created building block files, once they are created, export them to a safe location on the disk. This creates a backup copy of the building block file, should it be deleted by the user by mistake.

⑤ New Folder Button — Click the button to create a new folder that building blocks can be dragged into. Upon creation, a default folder name is highlighted and a custom name can be entered. Click a folder name twice to edit the folder name.

6 Building Blocks Panel — This panel contains folders and building blocks. Click and drag building blocks to change their order or place them inside folders. Click a building block name twice to edit the building block name. Click a folder name twice to edit the name of the folder.

Device Settings

The Device Settings dialog box provides access to general settings of the DMP 128 Plus. Select Tools >Device Settings to open the Device Settings dialog box. Device settings are only available when connected live to a device.

Within the Device Settings dialog box, the following tabs are available:

• Unit Info
  IP Settings
• Passwords
• Serial Settings
• Date/Time
• Dante Device

Unit Info

The Unit Info tab displays the unit name, firmware version, device model, device part number, and device MAC address. Click in the Unit Name field to rename the device within the listed naming parameters. Click Apply to save the changes.

Device Settings Date/Time Dance Device Unit Info P Settings Passwords Serial Settings Enter a name for your device. To restore the default name, clear the field and click Apply. Unit Name:DMP-128-Plus-C-AT-11-20 Firmware 1.01.0008 Model:DMP 128 Plus C AT Part Number:68-1512-10 MAC Address:08-05-46-11-20-15 Unit name can be up to 02 characters drawn from the alphabet (A-Z), digits (D-D), and minus sign/other (I) No exception are permitted and it is not close sensitive. The first character must be an alpha character. The last character must not be a minus sign/other OK Cancel Apply

Figure 155. Unit Info Tab

IP Settings

The IP Settings tab allows the user to view and edit the IP address, gateway IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP status of the unit. The checkbox to the left of each parameter must be checked before any changes can be made to that parameter. Click Apply to save the changes.

NOTE: Changing DHCP from 0n to 0ff resets the IP address to the factory default (192.168.254.254).

Device Settings Date/Time Date Device Unit Info IP Settings Password Serial Settings Select which parameter to change and enter to new value, then click Apply. Because you are currently connected via IP, only one parameter can be changed at a time. IP Address: 192.168.254.254 Gateway IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 DHCP: On Off Note: Changing DHCP from on to off will reset the IP address to the factory default (192.168.254.254). OK Cancel Apply

Figure 156. IP Settings Tab

Passwords

The Passwords tab allows the user to create or edit user and administrator passwords. An administrator password must be created in order to create a user password. The checkbox to the left of the password type (Admin or User) must be checked before creating or editing passwords. Click Apply to save the changes.

NOTE: Passwords only apply to IP connections and can be up to 12 characters in length.

Device Settings Date/Time Carate Device Unit Info.IF Settings Passwords Serial Settings To create or change a password, check the box and type the password twice. To delete, check the box and leave the text boxes blank. □ Admin Password: False password:: □ User Password: False password:: Note: Passwords are only available for IP connections. OK Cancel Apply

Figure 157. Passwords Tab

Serial Settings

The Serial Settings tab allows users to change the baud rate of the rear panel RS-232 port. Click Apply to save the changes.

NOTE: The recommended baud rate for the DMP 128 Plus is 38400.

Device Settings Date/Time Darte Device Unit Info IP Settings Passwords Serial Settings Select the desired baud rate. RS-232 Port: 38400 OK Cancel Apply

Figure 158. Serial Settings Tab

Date/Time

To set the date and time:

1. Click the Set Local button to sync the date and time information with the date and time on the connected PC.
2. Set the time zone by using the Zone drop-down.
3. Use the Daylight Savings radio buttons to enter the daylight saving region, or leave off (default).

-or-

1. Enter the desired date in the Date field. A drop-down calendar is available for date selection.
2. Enter the desired time in the Time field by clicking on the hours and entering the hour, then clicking on the minutes and entering the number of minutes.
3. Set the time zone by using the Zone drop-down.
4. Use the Daylight Savings radio buttons to enter the daylight saving region, or leave off (default).

Device Settings Unit Info IP Settings Passwords Sett Settings Date/Time Dante Device Set Date and Time Date: Thursday February 22, 2018 Time: 04:25 PM Refresh Set Local Note: Date and Time will only be pooled if checked. Zone: (UTC-08:00) Pacific Time (US & Cana Daylight Savings: ● OH ● USA ● Europe ● Brazil OK Cancel Apply

Figure 159. Date/Time Tab

NOTE: The information displayed in the Date/Time tab is static. In order to update the information to reflect the current time, click Refresh.

Dante Device

This tab allows the DMP 128 Plus Dante settings to be configured within DSP configurator without opening Dante Controller.

ATTENTION: It is essential that a Dante device be named immediately after it is connected to the Dante network and before audio connections with other devices are established. Existing connections are removed when a device is renamed.

Dante Device Name

A Dante device can be renamed to identify the device on the audio network.

To assign the Dante device name:

1. Select Tools > Device Settings.
2. Use the arrows to navigate to the Dante Device tab (see figure 160, ①).
3. Click the Device name text box (②).
4. Enter a device name for the Dante interface.
5. Click Apply ( ③). A confirmation dialog box opens.
6. Click Yes, to confirm existing connections will be removed after the name is changed.

Device Settings Unit 14 Date/Time Settings Dentle Device Passwords Serial Settings Device name: DMP128Plus-Lecture DHCP Static IP: 192.168.254.254 Subset: 256.258.258.0 Gateway: 0.0.0.0 DNS: 0.0.0.0 Reboot: Dante Refresh Enable Redundant Mode OK Cancel Apply

Figure 160. Dante Device Tab in Device Settings Dialog Box

Dante Device Network Settings

To configure Dante network settings:

1. Select the DHCP or Static IP radio buttons (4). If using DHCP, the DMP 128 Plus Dante interface will be assigned an IP address by the DHCP server and Dante network configuration is complete. If Static IP is selected, proceed to step 2.

2. Enter a valid network configuration into the respective fields.

3. Click Apply.

To reboot the Dante interface:

1. Click Reboot Dante (5 on the previous page). Only the Dante interface will reboot, not the entire DMP 128 Plus.

To refresh the device name and network configuration displayed:

1. Click Refresh (6 on the previous page) to have DSP Configurator refresh information from the DMP 128 Plus Dante interface.

Redundant Mode

In redundant mode, the 4-port AT switch acts as two separate 2-port switches that duplicate audio traffic (see Redundant Configuration on page 117).

To enable redundant mode:

1. Click the Enable Redundant Mode checkbox.
2. By default, the Static radio button is selected. Enter the redundant network configuration in the text boxes that appear below. Otherwise, select the DHCP radio button to have the DHCP server assign a redundant network configuration.

NOTE: A valid redundant static network configuration must be entered.

Options

The Options dialog box allows the user to edit and reset default options for DSP Configurator color schemes, default processor and gain block behavior, as well as a number of other settings. For a comprehensive overview of the Options dialog box, see the DSP Configurator Help file.

Options Appearance Color Style Defaults Complimentary Colors Graph Colors Preferences Auto Open Gains False Auto Open New Processors False Default Device Always Ask Default File Location Deletion Confirmation True Dynamics Meter Display Option 2 Show meters True Use Building Block Channel Names Always Ask Processor Defaults (Fiesel All Defaults) Factory Defaults Defaults Adaptive Gain AGC Auto Mixer Aux Input Gain Aux Output Attenuation Bess Compressor Complimentary Colors OK

Figure 161. Options Dialog Box

Expansion Bus

With the Extron Expansion (EXP) port, two EXP-enabled devices can be connected for bidirectional streaming of up to 16 channels of audio. EXP inputs and outputs contain DSP (see Expansion and AT Inputs on page 53 and Expansion Outputs on page 65).

Connecting the EXP Ports

When connecting a DMP 128 Plus to another EXP-enabled device for EXP communication, one of the devices must be set as the primary unit. The primary unit serves as the master clock for all EXP audio communication. The other unit must be set as a secondary unit in order for a connection to be established.

There are two different procedures for setting up DMP 128 Plus for EXP communication. The first procedure describes how to set up a DMP 128 Plus non-AT model with another EXP-enabled non-AT device for EXP communication (see Connecting a DMP 128 Plus non-AT with Another EXP-Enabled non-AT Device below).

The second procedure describes how to set up a DMP 128 Plus AT model with another EXP-enabled non-AT device for EXP communication (see Connecting a DMP 128 Plus AT Device and an EXP-enabled non-AT Device on page 95 on the next page).

NOTE: Two DMP 128 Plus AT models cannot be connected via the EXP port because AT models can only be configured as a primary unit and cannot be set as a secondary unit. Instead, use the rear panel AT switch to connect the two devices over a Dante network (see Dante Controller on page 107).

Connecting a DMP 128 Plus non-AT with Another EXP-Enabled non-AT Device

The DMP 128 Plus can be connected to either a DTP CrossPoint or another DMP 128 Plus via EXP. The following procedure describes connecting a DMP 128 Plus non-AT with either a DTP CrossPoint or another DMP 128 Plus non-AT model.

1. Connect live to the DMP 128 Plus.

NOTE: If connecting to DMP 128 Plus devices, decide which device will be set as primary unit and connect Live to that device.

1. Select Tools > Expansion Bus > Primary Unit.

2. Connect Live to the other DMP 128 Plus. If connecting a DTP CrossPoint, proceed to step 5.

3. Select Tools > Expansion Bus and ensure Secondary Unit is selected.

NOTE: If both devices are configured as primary or secondary, an EXP connection cannot be established.

1. Use a CAT 6 cable (such as the 1 foot cable included with the DMP 128 Plus) to connect the two rear panel EXP ports.

2. When the connection is established, the front panel EXP LED on the primary DMP 128 Plus lights steadily and the EXP LED on the secondary unit blinks rapidly.

NOTE: The DTP CrossPoint EXP LED is located on the rear panel next to the EXP port.

1. Open the Tools menu from the DMP 128 Plus main workspace and view the Expansion Bus status software LED (see figure 162, ①). The LED lights green when there is a valid connection.

Firmware Loader Organize Building Blocks Device Settings Options Expansion Bus

Figure 162. Expansion Bus Software LED

Connecting a DMP 128 Plus AT Device and an EXP-enabled non-AT Device

1. Connect Live to the DMP 128 Plus AT.
2. Select Tools > Expansion Bus > Use Extron Expansion Bus for channels 33-48 (see figure 163, ①). AT channels 33 through 48 now display as Expansion Inputs 1 through 8 and Expansion Inputs 9 through 16 in the main workspace (②).

NOTE: Dante channels 33 through 48 still appear in Dante controller, but are inactive when being used for Expansion Inputs 1 through 16.

Tools Window Help Run Macro Presets Current State Ready Presets... Configure Groups Configure Digital I/O Configure Players Configure ACP Panels Configure Macros Disconnect from Device F6 Device Manager Issue RESET Command Firmware Loader Organize Building Blocks Device Settings Options Network Audio Control Expansion Bus Primary Unit Secondary Unit Use Extron Expansion Bus for channels 33 - 48

Expansion Bus Refresh Channel Names + AT Inputs 1 - 8 + AT Inputs 9 - 16 + AT Inputs 17 - 24 + AT Inputs 25 - 32 + Expansion Inputs 1 - 8 + Expansion Inputs 9 - 16

Figure 163. Enabling Expansion Inputs on DMP 128 Plus AT

1. Connect Live to the DMP 128 Plus non-AT. If connecting a DTP CrossPoint, proceed to step 5.
2. Select Tools > Expansion Bus and ensure Secondary Unit is selected.

NOTES:

• DMP 128 Plus AT models cannot be configured as secondary units. This means the DMP 128 Plus non-AT must be configured as a secondary unit.

• If both devices are configured as primary, an EXP connection cannot be established.

• Use a CAT 6 cable (such as the 1 foot cable included with the DMP 128 Plus) to connect the two rear panel EXP ports.

• When the connection is established, the front panel EXP LED on the primary unit lights steadily and the EXP LED on the secondary unit blinks rapidly.

NOTE: The DTP CrossPoint EXP LED is located on the rear panel next to the EXP port.

1. Open the Tools menu from the DMP 128 Plus main workspace and view the Expansion Bus status software LED (see figure 164, ③). The LED lights green when there is a valid connection.

Firmware Loader Organize Building Blocks Device Settings Options Expansion Bus

Figure 164. Expansion Bus Software LED

Phone Dialer

The Phone Dialer dialog box is used for DMP 128 Plus VoIP line configuration and testing. Click Tools>Phone Dialer to open the Phone Dialer dialog box.

NOTES:

• DSP Configurator must be connected Live to a DMP 128 Plus V model in order for the Phone Dialer dialog to be opened.
• VoIP lines must be registered with the call server via the DMP 128 Plus VoIP web page (see DMP 128 Plus VoIP Web Page on page 167).

Dialer Line 1 - DMP Line 1 (1001) - Registered (Primary) One Prime 4 2004 Access (85.50) Appearance 2 Inactive New Call Line 1 Use 2 Line 3 Use 4 Use 5 Use 6 Line 7 Use 8 Hold ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ Clear 1 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV WXYZ * 0 OPER # ⑧ Enable Auto Answer for this line Ping Duration: 6

① Selected Line Information
② Appearance Window
③ Line Selection Buttons
④ New Call Button
⑤ Hold Button
⑥ Number Display
⑦ Dialer Keypad
⑧ Auto Answer Configuration

Figure 165. Phone Dialer Dialog Box

① Selected Line Information — Displays the line number, display name, extension number, and registration status of the selected line.
② Appearance Window — Displays line appearances configured in the DMP 128 Plus, line extension, call status, and call duration. Appearances must be selected to place or receive calls on a specific appearance.
③ Line Selection Buttons — Click these buttons to select a line and make calls or display corresponding line information. When a call is incoming on a specific line, the corresponding button flashes red.
4 New Call Button — Click this button after selecting a line and appearance to dial a number using the dialer keypad.

⑤ Hold Button — Click this button during a call to put the call on hold. Click it again to take a call off hold.
6 Number Field — Displays the number dialed with the dialer keypad. Alternatively, click this field and use the keyboard to dial a number.
⑦ Dialer Keypad — Contains software buttons for dialing when not in an active call and sending DTMF signals to the far end while in an active call. The green “off hook” button places a call after a number is dialed. The red “on hook” button ends a call on the selected line and appearance. The Clear button clears the number field.
⑧ Auto Answer Configuration — Contains a checkbox and Ring Duration field. Select the checkbox to enable auto answer on all appearances of the selected line (unchecked by default). Use the Ring Duration field to enter the amount of time in seconds before the line auto answers.

Placing a Call with the Phone Dialer

NOTE: VoIP lines must be registered with the call server via the DMP 128 Plus VoIP web page (see DMP 128 Plus VoIP Web Page on page 167) and assigned to an Aux input and output (see Aux Inputs on page 43).

1. Select Tools>Phone Dialer. The Phone Dialer dialog opens.
2. Select a line using the Line buttons (see figure 165, ③ on the previous page).
3. Click New Call (4).
4. Enter the desired number or extension using the keypad (7). Alternatively, click the number field (6) and type the desired number or extension using the keyboard.
5. Click the green "off hook" button on the keypad (⑦).
6. The appearance window (②) displays the status of the call.
7. Click Hold to place the call on hold. Click Hold again to return to the call.
8. Click the red "on hook" button to end the call.

Receiving a Call with the Phone Dialer

NOTE: VoIP lines must be registered with the call server via the DMP 128 Plus VoIP web page (see DMP 128 Plus VoIP Web Page on page 167) and assigned to an Aux input and output (see Aux Inputs on page 43).

1. Select Tools>Phone Dialer. The Phone Dialer dialog opens.
2. When a call is incoming, the corresponding Line button flashes red.
3. Click the Line button with the incoming call.
4. Highlight the appearance the call is on.
5. Click the green "off hook" button on the keypad.
6. Click the red "on hook" button to end the call.

Audio Control Panels (ACP)

Extron Audio Control Panels (ACP) are configurable control interfaces for use with the DMP 128 Plus. ACP panels connect to the rear panel ACP port of a DMP 128 Plus via a 4-pole 3.5 mm captive screw connector (see figure 2, F on page 5). Each ACP panel includes two ACP ports that support both power and communication between the DMP 128 Plus and the ACP panel. This section includes the following topics:

• ACP Panel Types
• Panel ID #
  • ACP Panel Button Control Types
  • Using Multiple ACP Panels
• Configuration Examples

ACP Panel Types

ACP panels work by affecting group master controls, preset recall, and macro triggers, all of which must be configured on the DMP 128 Plus prior to configuring the ACP panels. The Configure ACPs dialog box presents a series of drop-down lists that populate with group masters, presets, and macros, according to the selections made.

When the Configure ACPs dialog is launched, the user is first asked to select a panel from the ACP Panel Type drop-down list. There are four models of ACP panel:

• ACP 100
• ACP 106 D
• ACP 106 EU
• ACP 106 MK

After a panel type is selected, the Configure ACPs dialog displays an image of the selected panel. The ACP 100 has six fully configurable buttons and a dedicated rotary volume knob. The ACP 106 style panels (ACP 106 D, 106 EU, and 106 MK) have six buttons. Two buttons are dedicated to mute off/mute on, two are dedicated to volume down/volume up, and the remaining two buttons are fully configurable.

All panels come with a default set of button labels. The ACP 100 also comes with additional button labels that can be used to relabel the buttons for alternate applications (see the ACP 100 Setup Guide for information on replacing buttons labels). Additional buttons for the ACP 106 style panels can be ordered from www.extron.com (see the ACP 106 D Setup Guide and ACP 106 EU/MK Setup Guide for information on replacing buttons).

Panel ID #

Panel ID numbers (ID #) are used to identify ACP panels connected to the DMP 128 Plus and are necessary for the panel to function. The ID # is set using the DIP switch assembly on the physical ACP panel. Once the panel ID has been set on the physical device, the ID is selected in the Configure ACPs dialog box when the panel is being configured in DSP Configurator (for information on how to set the panel ID #, see the corresponding ACP panel setup guide).

ACP Panel Button Control Types

Click on a button or rotary control within the panel image to select that button for configuration. When selected, the button or control will turn yellow to indicate that it is active for configuration, and the Configure ACPs dialog box will populate with a series of drop-down lists for that purpose. First, one of the following control types must be selected:

• Action-Fixed
  • Action-Follow Selector
• Selector-Vol/Mute

There are two basic control types: Action and Selector. Action controls can be either Action-Fixed or Action-Follow Selector. A button with dedicated functionality, such as a rotary knob or dedicated volume or mute buttons, can only be configured as an Action control type.

Action-Fixed

Buttons configured with the Action-Fixed control type perform an action that is tied to a fixed group, preset, or macro, and is not affected by or dependent on selections made on other buttons. When Action-Fixed is selected, the Configure ACPs dialog populates with a series of drop-down list selections shown in the table below. When a selection is made in the Action list, the Configure ACPs dialog then populates with subsequent selections.

Action Select 1 Select 2	LED Behavior
Group Mute On Mute Master	— Reflects Current State
Group Mute off Mute Master	— Reflects Current State
Group Mute Toggle Mute	Master — Reflects Current State
Group Volume Down Volume	Master — Reflects Current State
Group Volume Up	Volume Master — Reflects Current State
Group Vol Rotary (ACP 100 only)	Volume Master — Reflects Current State
Preset Recall	Preset	— Reflects Current State
Preset Toggle	Preset 1	Preset 2	Lit press/Unlit release Toggles Lit/Unlit
Macro Trigger	Macro	— Lit press/Unlit release
Macro Toggle	Macro 1	Macro 2	Lit press/Unlit release Toggles Lit/Unlit

Figure 166. Action-Fixed Selection Table

Action-Follow Selector

A button configured with the Action-Follow Selector control type performs an action that is tied to a volume group or a mute group, but is dependent on a Selector-Vol/Mute button to define which group the button affects. The table below shows the drop-down list selections that are available when Action-Follow Selector is chosen as the control type.

Action

Group Mute On

Group Mute Off

Group Mute Toggle

Group Volume Down

Group Volume Up

Group Vol Rotary (ACP 100 only)

Figure 167. Action-Follow Selector Selection Table

Selector-Vol/Mute (Selector)

Buttons configured as a Selector-Vol/Mute define a gain or mute group. A Selector-Vol/Mute button acts as a modifier for Action-Follow Selector buttons or controls. For example, if an Action-Follow Selector button is configured to increase or decrease the volume of a group, a Selector button defines which gain group is affected by the volume increase or decrease. Two or more Selector buttons are necessary for Action-Follow Selector buttons to function properly.

Button Labels

Each button can be labeled to match the control type or function assigned to the button. In the Label text field on the right side of the Configure ACPs dialog box, type a name to aid in identifying the function of each button.

Using Multiple ACP Panels

The two ports on the back of an ACP panel support power from and communication with the host DMP 128 Plus. Up to eight ACP panels can be daisy-chained together for more demanding control needs.

NOTES:

• The DMP 128 Plus rear-panel ACP port provides 6 W of power.
• Use an Extron PS 1220EB power supply or Extron 12 V desktop power supply when additional power is required. Refer to the ACP panel setup guide for wiring details.

Configuration Examples

ACP panels can be configured to meet a wide variety of control needs. The following configuration procedures are examples of flexible configurations using the default buttons that ship with the ACP panels. The two configuration examples are covered:

• ACP 100 Configuration Example
• ACP 106 Style Configuration Example

Create the following gain and mute groups from the Configure Groups dialog box (see Configuring Groups on page 70).

• Mute and Gain groups for all microphone channels.
• Mute and Gain groups for all program channels.
• Mute and Gain groups for each individual program source.
• Mute group for all output attenuation blocks.

ACP 100 Configuration Example

1. From the DMP 128 Plus main workspace in DSP Configurator, select Tools>Configure ACP Panels. The Configure ACPs dialog box opens.
2. Select an empty tab from the top of the dialog box to build a new configuration (see figure 168, ① below).
3. From the ACP Panel Type drop-down, select ACP 100 (2). The Configure ACPs dialog box populates with an ACP 100 graphic.
4. From the ID # drop-down menu (③), select the ID number that corresponds with the bus ID set on the ACP 100 rear panel DIP switch assembly (see the ACP 100 Setup Guide for information on setting the bus ID).
5. In the panel graphic on the left side of the Configure ACPs dialog box, the button labeled MIC is highlighted (yellow). When a button is highlighted, it is selected for configuration.
6. From the Control Type drop-down, choose Selector-Vol/Mute (4). On the right side of the Configure ACPs dialog box, more configuration options appear.

a. From the Volume Master drop-down (5), select the gain group containing all microphone source channels. This group must be created from the Configure Groups dialog box before it can be selected from the drop-down (see Configuring Groups on page 70).
b. From the Mute Master drop-down (6), select the mute group containing all microphone source channels.

Configure ACPs ACP 107 (ID#1) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) ACP Panel Type: ID # ACP 100 1 Control Type: Selector-Val/Mute Label: MIC VOLUME MASTER: Select Mute Master: Select LED Behavior: Lit until alternate selector. Push Configuration to Device Close Extron

Figure 168. Starting ACP 100 Configuration

1. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the button labeled PRGM (see figure 168, ⑦ above).

2. From the Control Type drop-down, choose Selector-Vol/Mute (figure 168, 4).

a. From the Volume Master drop-down (5), select the gain group containing all program source channels.
b. From the Mute Master drop-down (6), select the gain group containing all program source channels.

1. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the button labeled Source #1 (8).

2. From the Control Type drop-down ④), choose Selector-Vol/Mute.

a. From the Volume Master drop-down ( 5 ), select the gain group containing just the first program source channels.
b. From the Mute Master drop-down (6), select the gain group containing just the first program source channels.

1. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for additional individual program sources using the SOURCE #2 and SOURCE #3 buttons (up to three program sources can be controlled with this configuration).
2. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the button labeled MUTE (see figure 169, ① below).
3. From the Control Type drop-down (2), select either:

• Action-Fixed for the MUTE button to mute all output.
- Action-Follow Selector for the MUTE button to mute groups defined by a selector button.

If Action-Fixed was chosen:

a. From the Action drop-down ( 3 ), select Group Mute Toggle.
b. From the Mute Master drop-down (4), select the mute group containing all output channels.
c. From the LED Behavior drop-down (5), select Red reflects Mute On to turn the button red when mute is engaged, or White reflects Mute On to turn the button white when mute is engaged.

If Action-Follow Selector was chosen:

a. From the Action drop-down (6), select Group Mute Toggle.
b. From the LED Behavior drop-down (7), select Red reflects Mute On to turn the button red when mute is engaged, or White reflects Mute On to turn the button white when mute is engaged.

ACP100* (ID#1) empty> (ID#0) empty> (ID#0) empty> (ID#0) empty> (ID#0) empty> (ID#0) empty> (ID#0) ACP Panel Type: ACP 100 ID # 1 Control Type: Action-Fixed Label: MUTE MC PRGM SOURCE #1 SOURCE #2 VOLUME SOURCE #3 VOL MUTE Extron Action: Group Mute Toggle Mass Master: Select LED Behavior: Select

ACP100* (ID#1) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) ACP Panel Type: ID # ACP 100 1 Control Type: Action Follow Selector Label: MUTE 6 Action: Group Mute Toggle 7 LED Behavior: Select MC PRGM SOURCE #1 SOURCE #2 VOLUME SOURCE #3 MUTE 1 Extrim

Figure 169. Mute Button Configuration

1. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the VOL knob (see figure 170, ① below).

2. From the Control Type drop-down ②), choose Action-Follow Selector.

Configure ACPs ACP 100 (ID#1) (ID#2) (ID#3) (ID#4) (ID#5) (ID#6) (ID#7) (ID#8) ACP Panel Type: ACP 100 ID # 1 Control Type: Action-Follow Selector Label: VOL Action: Volume Rotary MIC PREM SOURCE #1 SOURCE #2 VOLUME SOURCE #3 MUTE Extran Push Configuration to Device Close

Figure 170. Rotary Volume Knob Configuration

The ACP 100 panel is now fully configured. From this point, either:

• Add additional ACP panel configurations.
• Save the ACP panel configuration to the DSP Configurator configuration file (see Saving and Pushing ACP Configurations on page 106).
• Push the configurations to the DMP 128 Plus (see Saving and Pushing ACP Configurations on page 106).

ACP 106 Style Configuration Example

1. From the DMP 128 Plus main workspace in DSP Configurator, select Tools>Configure ACP Panels. The Configure ACPs dialog box opens.
2. Select an empty tab from the top of the dialog box to build a new configuration (see figure 171, ① below).
3. From the ACP Panel Type drop-down (②), select the ACP 106 model to be configured. The Configure ACPs dialog box populates with a graphic of the selected ACP 106.
4. From the ID # drop-down (③), select the ID number that corresponds with the bus ID set on the ACP 106 DIP switch assembly (see the ACP 106 D Setup Guide or the ACP 106 EU/MK Setup Guide for information on setting the bus ID #).

Configure ACPs ACP106 D* (ID#1) (ID#0) (ID#3) (ID#2) (ID#5) (ID#6) (ID#9) ACP Panel Type: ID # ACP 106 D 1 Control Type: Label: Action-Fixed OFF

Figure 171. Selecting ACP 106 for Configuration

1. In the panel graphic on the left side of the Configure ACPs dialog box, the mute button labeled OFF is highlighted (yellow). When a button is highlighted, it is selected for configuration.
2. From the Control Type drop-down (see figure 172, ④ below), select either:

• Action-Fixed for the OFF button to unmute all output.
- Action-Follow Selector for the OFF button to unmute a group defined by a selector button.

If Action-Fixed was chosen:

a. From the Mute Master drop-down (5), select the mute group containing all output channels.

If Action-Follow Selector was chosen, the button is fully configured.

1. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the mute button labeled ON (6).
2. From the Control Type drop-down (⑦), select either:

• Action-Fixed for the ON button to mute all output.
- Action-Follow Selector for the ON button to mute a group defined by a selector button.

NOTE: The same control type chosen for the OFF mute button should be chosen for the ON mute button.

If Action-Fixed was chosen:

a. From the Mute Master drop-down (8), select the mute group containing all output channels.

If Action-Follow Selector was chosen, the button is fully configured.

Configure ACPs ACP106 D* (ID#1) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) ACP Panel Type: ID # ACP 106 D 1 4 Control Type: Label: Action-Fixed OFF Action: Group Mute Off 5 Mute Master: Select LED Behavior: Reflects current state 6 Control Type: Label: Action-Follow Selector OFF OFF ON VOLUME DOWN UP MIC PROGRAM OKING Push Configurations to Device Close 7 Control Type: 8 LED Behavior: Action-Follow Selector OFF Group Mute Off LED Behavior: Reflects current state Push Configuration to Device Close

Figure 172. Configuring Mute Off and Mute On Buttons

1. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the volume button labeled DOWN (see figure 173, ⑨ below).

2. From the Control Type drop-down, choose Action-Follow Selector (10).

3. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the volume button labeled UP (1).

4. From the Control Type drop-down, choose Action-Follow Selector (10).

Configure ACPs ACP 106 D* (ID#1) empty> (ID#0) (ID#0) (ID#0) empty> (ID#0) empty> (ID#0) empty> (ID#0) ACP Panel Type: ACP 106 D ID # I Control Type: Action-Follow Selector Label: DOWN Action: Group Volume Down LED Behavior: Reflects current state 9 11 MUTE OFF ON VCP LINE DOM UP MIC PROGRAM Push Configuration to Device Close

Figure 173. Configuring Volume Down and Volume Up

1. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the button labeled MIC (see figure 174, 13 on the next page).

2. From the Control Type drop-down (14), choose Selector-Vol/Mute.

a. From the Volume Master drop-down (15), select the gain group containing all microphone source channels. This group must be created from the Configure Groups dialog box before it can be selected from the drop-down (see Managing Devices in Device Manager on page 83).

b. From the Mute Master drop-down (16), select the mute group containing all microphone source channels.

1. From the panel graphic on the left side of the dialog box, select the button labeled PROGRAM (see figure 174, 17 below).
2. From the Control Type drop-down (18), choose Selector-Vol/Mute.

a. From the Volume Master drop-down (19), select the gain group containing all program source channels.

b. From the Mute Master drop-down (20), select the gain group containing all program source channels.

Configure ACPs ACP 106 D° (ID#T) (ID#D) (ID#D) (ID#D) (ID#D) (ID#D) (ID#D) ACP Panel Type: ID # ACP 106 D: 1 13 Control Type: Selector Vol/Mute Label: MIC VOLUME DOWN UP Volume Master: Select Mute Master: Select LED Behavior: LI until alternate selection PROGRAM Push Configuration to Device Close Configure ACPs ACP 106 D° (ID#T) (ID#D) (ID#D) (ID#D) (ID#D) (ID#D) ACP Panel Type: ID # ACP 106 D: 1 18 Control Type: Selector Vol/Mute Label: OFF ON VOLUME DOWN UP MIC PROGRAM MIC PROGRAM Push Configuration to Device Close 19 Volume Master: Select 20 Mute Master: Select LED Behavior: LI until alternate selector Push Configuration to Device Close

Figure 174. Configuring Mic and Program Selector Buttons

The ACP 106 panel is now fully configured. From this point, either:

• Add additional ACP panel configurations.
• Save the ACP panel configuration to the DSP Configurator configuration file (see Saving and Pushing ACP Configurations below).
• Push the configurations to the DMP 128 Plus (see Saving and Pushing ACP Configurations below).

Saving and Pushing ACP Configurations

1. Configure up to four ACP panels.
2. Close the Configure ACPs dialog box. Button configurations remain after the dialog box is closed.
3. Save the configuration file. ACP configurations are saved with the configuration file.
4. Connect Live to a DMP 128 Plus via a LAN (TCP/IP) connection.

NOTE: The host computer must be connected to the DMP 128 Plus LAN port in order to push ACP configurations to the device.

1. Select Tools > Configure ACP Panels. The Configure ACPs dialog box opens.

2. Click Push Configuration to Device. Configurations from all four tabs in the Configure ACPs dialog box are pushed to the DMP 128 Plus.

Dante Controller

This section describes the DMP 128 Plus AT network installation, configuration, and control using Dante Controller for Windows and covers the following topics:

• Overview
  • Downloading and Installing Dante Controller
• Configuring the DMP 128 Plus AT in Dante Controller
  • Physical Dante Network Setup
  • Dante Controller Operation
  • Dante Routing Operation
  • Dante Troubleshooting

Overview

DMP 128 Plus AT devices (DMP 128 Plus AT, C AT, and C V AT) use Dante technology by Audinate to provide high performance digital audio networking over standard TCP/IP networks. The Dante Controller software application is used to route audio on the network. Dante allows audio channels to be transported across a switched Ethernet data network while meeting the quality requirements of professional audio.

Up to 24 channels can be transmitted from the DMP 128 Plus AT to the Dante network and up to 48 channels can be received by the DMP 128 Plus AT from the Dante network. AT inputs 33 through 48 can be used to facilitate EXP bus communication (see Connecting a DMP 128 Plus AT Device and an EXP-enabled non-AT Device on page 95).

Audio signals are converted by DMP 128 Plus AT devices, processed and routed to the AT bus, and transmitted onto the Dante network. Audinate recommends the Dante audio network be kept separate from other networks. However, the audio network can be shared with control traffic or unrelated data traffic. Audio channels can be unicast or multicast to make the best use of available bandwidth.

Downloading and Installing Dante Controller

Dante Controller from Audinate is required to route transmitters and receivers and can be used to configure Dante settings and monitor performance. Install Dante Controller on a PC running Microsoft® Windows® 7 or newer. For full details about computer requirements and to download the software, see the Dante Controller product page at www.extron.com.

To download Dante Controller:

1. On the Extron Electronics web page, click the Download tab (see figure 175, ① below). The Download page opens.
2. On the left sidebar, click the Dante Controller link (②). The Dante Controller page opens (see figure 176 on the next page).

Products Training Markets Tech Library Company Download Search Download Home Software Dante Controller DSP Configurator Software Global Configurator Global Configurator Professional GUI Configurator GUI Designer IP Intercom HelpDesk Software PCS XTP System Configuration Software Control System Drivers Hardware HID Modules Resources GUI Design Resources TouchLink Touchpanel Themes Architectural Design Resources 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250

Figure 175. Accessing the Dante Controller Download Page

1. On the Dante Controller page, click Download (see figure 176, ① below). The Download Center page opens.

Extron Electronics INTERFACING, SWITCHING AND CONTROL My Account | My Favorites Order Support: 800 833 9673 S3 Support Hotline: [phone] Control Systems Support Hotline: [phone] Products Training Tools Tech Library Company Download Extron Insider Product Home Software Configuration Software - Dante Controller ( Previous Next ) Dante Controller Configuration Software for Dante-Enabled Audio Products Key Features • Initiative software for setting up and managing DMP 128 AT processors, AXP 50 C AT and AXP 64 C AT expansion processors, NetPA® power amplifiers, and AXI 22 AT D wallplate interfaces on a Dante™ audio network • Clear visual layout of devices on the network and their available audio input and output channels • Quickly create I/O routing assignments with a click of a mouse • Apply custom labels to device names and their input and output channels • Visual layout can be customized with collapsible device channel views • Save I/O routing assignments as presets See All Features > Image Gallery Dante Video Tutorials VERSION RELEASE DATE SIZE RELEASE NOTES 3.10.0.19 Aug. 24, 2016 42.6 MB 0.2 MB Download SIMULAR PRODUCTS DSP Configurator Software DSP Application Software

Figure 176. Dante Controller Page

1. On the Download Center page, click the Download button and follow the prompts to download or run the Dante Controller installer file. If you choose to save the file for later installation, note the location.

Download Center Download dantecontroller.exe Please provide the following information. *Name: John D. Doe *Company Name: Extron Title: Installer *E-Mail: [e-mail] Download dantecontroller.exe Remember Me Note: By downloading this software you agree to our terms and conditions.

Figure 177. Download Center, Dante Controller File

1. If you choose to run the file, follow all prompts. If you saved the file, click the saved file to begin installation when ready.

The installed Dante Controller program files are saved in:

C:\Program Files (x86)\Audinate\Dante Controller\DanteController.exe.

Configuring the DMP 128 Plus AT in Dante Controller

Use a standard Ethernet cable to connect the DMP 128 Plus AT to a Dante network via the rear panel AT port (see figure 2, ① on page 5) and power the device.

Device Name

Multiple devices on the same Dante network can present difficulty in identifying individual devices. To avoid confusion and difficulty, ensure the following steps are taken:

• Connect devices to the Dante network one at a time.
• Rename each device before making audio connections in Dante Controller.
• Rename each device with a unique and meaningful identifier.
• Rename each device before the next device is connected to the Dante network.

ATTENTION: It is essential that a Dante device be named before audio subscriptions with other devices are established. Existing subscriptions are removed when a device is renamed.

In Dante Controller, a device can be renamed to identify the device on the audio network. The default device name of the DMP 128 Plus AT consists of the model name, followed by the last six characters of the Dante interface MAC address (for example, DMP128P-0ee8ee). In addition to renaming the device, individual Transmitter (Tx) and Receiver (Rx) channels can be renamed.

The Dante device name must be set before making any connections to other devices on the Dante network. Renaming a device after making connections removes existing connections to and from that device. Refer to Renaming the DMP 128 Plus AT in Dante Controller on the next page for renaming procedure.

Receiver and Transmitter Names

In addition to renaming a device, individual transmitter and receiver channels can be renamed in Dante Controller. Rename transmitter and receiver channels to reflect the location of the device or the purpose of the transmitter or receiver. Ensure transmitter and receiver channels are renamed before making audio connections between devices. Refer to Renaming a Receiver or Transmitter on page 113 for renaming procedure.

Dante Controller Naming Conventions

• Device names follow Domain Name System (DNS) hostname rules. Legal characters are A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and hyphen (-). Names must begin with a letter and cannot end with a hyphen (-).
• Dante Tx and Rx channel names (also known as labels) can be up to 31 characters in length. Label names are not case-sensitive. For example, “ANALOG OUT-1” and “analog out-1” are recognized as the same name. Unicode and non-roman characters are not supported.
• Tx and Rx channel labels can use any character except equals (=), period (.), or @.
• Tx and Rx channel labels must be unique on a device but do not need to be unique on the network.

Renaming the DMP 128 Plus AT in Dante Controller

NOTE: Dante device naming can also be done via DSP Configurator (see Dante Device on page 92).

1. Ensure that the control computer and a single DMP 128 Plus AT are connected to the same network.
2. From the control computer Start menu select:

All Programs > Audinate > Dante Controller > Dante Controller

1. The Dante Controller - Network View screen opens. All Dante devices on the network are discovered and listed.
2. From the Device menu, select Device View or press on the keyboard (see figure 178 below).

File Device View Help Refresh F5 Device View Ctrl+D

Figure 178. Opening Device View

1. The Dante Controller - Device View dialog opens. Select the device being configured from the (Select a Dante Device...) drop-down list (see figure 179, ① below).

Dante Controller - Device View File Device View Help Select a Dante ... AXI22D-ConfRm1 AXI22D-ConfRm2 DMP12BP-DeeBee

Figure 179. Device View and Select a Dante Device Drop-Down

NOTES:

• If there are multiple DMP 128 Plus AT devices connected to the network that have not been renamed, obtain the Dante interface media access code (MAC) address of the desired device from the white label on the rear panel of the device in order to identify it in Dante Controller.
• There are two MAC addresses listed on the rear panel of a DMP 128 Plus AT, one for the LAN port and one for the Dante interface. The Dante interface MAC address is listed beneath the LAN port MAC address.

The Device View dialog populates with the selected DMP 128 Plus AT information.

Dante Controller - Device View (DMP128+-0ee8ee) File Device View Help Receive Transmit Status Latency Device Config Network Config AES67 Config Receive Channels Available Channels Channel Signal Connected to Status Exp_In-01 Exp_In-02 Exp_In-03 Exp_In-04 Exp_In-05 Filter AXI22D-ConfRm1 AXI22D-ConfRm2 DMP128+-0ee8ee

Figure 180. Populated Device View Dialog Box

1. Click the Device Config tab (see figure 181, ① below) to open the Device Config page.
2. In the Rename Device panel, enter the new name of the device in the text field. No spaces are allowed in the name. Names should be significant identifiers. For example, enter DMP128Plus-MainRack (②).
3. Click Apply ( ③). A confirmation prompt opens.

Dante Controller - Device View (DMP128+-0ee8ee) File Device View Help Receive Transmit Status Latency Device Config Network Config AES67 Config DMP128P-0ee8... Rename Device ② DMP128Plus-MainRack Apply Press ESC to cancel editing. Names must not begin or end with - (dash).

Figure 181. Device Config Dialog, Rename Device

1. Click Yes (4) to confirm the new name, then close the Device Configuration dialog box. The new name is written to the Dante interface of the DMP 128 Plus AT. Repeat as necessary for all devices.

NOTE: The device name assigned in Dante Controller only applies to the Dante interface and does not affect the device name recognized in DSP Configurator.

Dante Controller Renaming a device breaks existing audio routes from this device to other devices. Are you sure you want to rename DMP128P-0eeSee to DMP128Plus-MainRack? Yes No

Figure 182. Rename Device Confirmation Dialog Box

Renaming a Receiver or Transmitter

In addition to renaming devices, individual receiver and transmitter channels can be renamed in Dante Controller. To better organize the various receivers and transmitters, it is recommended each receiver and each transmitter be named using a description of the device they belong to, the location of the device, or the purpose of the receiver or transmitter.

To view the receiver or transmitter channels in Dante Controller, click the + sign next to the receiver or transmitter device name to expand it. The + sign becomes a - sign when the device is expanded (see figure 183, ①).

Dante Controller - Network View File Device View Help Haster Clock: DMP128Plus-MainRack Routing Device Info Clock Status Network Status Events Dante™ Filter Transmitters AXI220-ConfRm1 AXI220-ConfRm2 Filter Receivers DMP128Plus-MainRack DMP128Plus-MainRack DXP128Plus-MainRack DXP128Plus-MainRack DXP128Plus-MainRack DXP128Plus-MainRack DXP128Plus-MainRack DXP128Plus-MainRack DXP128Plus-MainRack DXP128Plus-MainRack DXP128Plus-MainRack DXP 128Plus-MainRack DXP 128Plus-MainRack DXP 128Plus-MainRack DXP 128Plus-MainRack DXP 128Plus-MainRack DXP 128Plus-MainRack DXP 128Plus-MainRack DXP 128Plus-MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainK DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack DXP 128 Plus MainRack

Figure 183. Expanded Device View — Input and Output Names

TIP: To simplify setup and operation of large matrix systems, rename the receiver and transmitter channels to better indicate the source at the transmitters or receivers.

Renaming a Receiver

The default names shown in the Dante Receivers column are extracted from the Dante interface of the connected device (see figure 183, ①). The DMP 128 Plus AT receivers are labelled EXP_In-01 through EXP_In-48 because the DMP 128 Plus AT can receive signal at the 48 EXP inputs. Follow the instructions on the next page to rename a receiver.

To rename a DMP 128 Plus AT receiver:

1. From the Device menu on the Network View screen, select Device View, or press on the keyboard. The Device View dialog box opens.
2. From the (Select a Dante Device...) drop-down menu, select the name of the desired DMP 128 Plus AT (see figure 184, ① below).
3. On the Device View screen, select the Receive tab (2).
4. Click on the name of the receiver to be renamed. The name becomes a text box with a cursor (③).
5. Enter the new name (up to 31 characters) using any combination of letters, numbers, and special characters except for @, =, and . (period).
6. Press on the keyboard to confirm the name, or click another channel text box.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to rename additional receiver channels.
8. When finished renaming receivers, close the Device View dialog box.

Danie Controller - Device View (DMP128Plus-MainRack) File Device View Help DMP128Plus-MainRa... Receive Transmit Status Latency Device Config Network Config AES67 Config Receive Channels Channel Signal Connected to Status Exp_In-01 Exp_In-02 Exp_In-03 Exp_In-04 Available Channels Filter AXI22D-ConfRm1 AXI22D-ConfRm2 DMP128Plus-MainRack

Figure 184. Device View Screen — Renaming a Receiver

Renaming a Transmitter

The default names shown in the Dante Transmitters column are extracted from the Dante interface of the connected device (see figure 183, ② on the previous page). The first set of DMP 128 Plus AT transmitters is labelled Output-01 through Output-08 because the DMP 128 Plus AT can transmit signal routed to the analog outputs to the Dante network. The second set of DMP 128 Plus AT transmitters is labelled EXP-Out-01 through Exp_Out-16 because the DMP 128 Plus AT can transmit signal routed to the EXP outputs to the Dante network. Follow the instructions on the next page to rename a transmitter.

To rename a DMP 128 Plus AT transmitter:

1. Select Device View from the Device menu on the Network View screen or press on the keyboard. The Device View dialog box opens.
2. From the (Select a Dante Device...) drop-down menu, select the name of the DMP 128 Plus AT (see figure 185, ① below).
3. On the Device View screen, select the Transmit tab (2).
4. Click in the Channel Label column to the right of the name of the transmitter being renamed. A text box and cursor appear (3).
5. Enter a new name (up to 31 characters) using any combination of letters, numbers, and special characters except for @, =, and . (period).
6. Press on the keyboard to confirm the name, or click another label text box.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to rename additional transmitter channels.
8. When finished renaming transmitters, close the Device View dialog box.

Dante Controller - Device View (DMP128Plus-MainRack) File Device View Help DMP128Plus-MainRa... Receive Tranmit Status Latency Device Config Network Config AE567 Config Transmit Channels Channel Sign Channel Label Output-01 1 Output-02 Output-03 Output-04 Output-05 Transmit Flows Unicast: 0 Multicast: 0 Total: 0 of 32

Figure 185. Device View Screen — Renaming a Transmitter

Finding a Dante Device IP Address

To find the IP address of a Dante device, the name of the device is needed (see Renaming the DMP 128 Plus AT in Dante Controller on page 111).

NOTE: If the DMP 128 Plus AT has not been renamed, its default name consists of the product name followed by a hyphen, plus the last 6 digits of the device MAC address (for example, DMP128P-0ee8ee).

1. Open Dante Controller.
2. On the Dante Controller-Network View screen, click the Device Info tab (see figure 186, ① below).
3. On the Device Info page, locate the name of the DMP 128 Plus AT in the Device Name column (②). The IP address is located in the Primary Address column (③). In the example below, the IP address for the connected DMP 128 Plus AT is 192.168.11.120.

Dante Controller - Network View File Device View Help Haster Clock: DMP128Plus-MainRack Routing Device Info Clock Status Network Status Events Device Name Product Type Product Version Device Lock Primary Address Primary Link Speed Secondary Address Secondary Link Speed AXI44-ConfRm1 AXI 44 AT 1.0.0 N/A 192.168.11.181 100Mbps N/A N/A AXI22D-ConfRm2 AXI 22 AT D 1.0.0 N/A 192.168.11.198 100Mbps N/A N/A DMP 128Plus-MainRack DMP128Plus 1.0.0.1 192.168.11.120 1Gbps N/A N/A

Figure 186. Device Info Page

Physical Dante Network Setup

A physical network is required to share Dante audio channels between Dante-enabled devices like the DMP 128 Plus AT. Other Dante-enabled devices must be on the same physical network in order to communicate via Dante. There are two types of network topology that can be used to create a physical Dante network.

• Star Topology • Daisy Chain Topology

Star network topology has one DMP 128 Plus AT as the central unit which is directly connected to up to 3 other units. A larger network switch can be used in place of a central DMP 128 Plus AT, allowing more than four total units to be connected in the star topology.

graph TD
    A["Network Port 1"] -->|Ethernet Interface| B["DMP 128 Plus C AT #1"]
    A -->|Ethernet Interface| C["DMP 128 Plus C AT #2"]
    A -->|Ethernet Interface| D["DMP 128 Plus C AT #3"]
    A -->|Ethernet Interface| E["DMP 128 Plus C AT #4"]
    B --> F["Terminal"]
    C --> G["Terminal"]
    D --> H["Terminal"]
    E --> I["Terminal"]

Figure 187. Star Network Topology

Daisy Chain topology has DMP 128 Plus AT units connected in succession.

DMP 128 Plus C AT Master DMP 128 Plus C AT #2 DMP 128 Plus C AT #3 DMP 128 Plus C AT #4

Figure 188. Daisy Chain Network Topology

Hybrid versions combining the star and daisy chain topologies can be used, but a ring topology or any topology that creates a duplicate connection causes a failure in Dante Controller. Redundant connections are possible using the primary and secondary port interface structure (see Redundant Configuration on the next page).

Redundant Configuration

In redundant mode, the 4-port AT switch acts as two separate 2-port switches that duplicate audio traffic. Ports 3 and 4 are marked (PRI) for primary while ports 1 and 2 are marked (SEC) for secondary (see figure 189 below). Primary and secondary switches cannot be connected together anywhere in the audio network. Redundant configuration can be enabled using Dante Controller or DSP Configurator.

Secondary Ports Primary Ports 1 (SEC) 2 3 (PRI) 4 AT @Danie* LAN USB AUDIO RESET

Figure 189. Primary and Secondary AT Ports

To configure the DMP 128 Plus in redundant mode using Dante Controller:

1. Open Dante Controller.
2. Press on the keyboard to access the Device View dialog box.

3. Select the desired DMP 128 Plus AT from the (Choose a Dante Device...) drop-down menu (see figure 190, ① below).

4. Select the Network Config tab (②).

5. From the Dante Redundancy panel, use the drop-down to select Redundant (3).

Dante Controller - Device View (DMP128Plus-MainRack) File Device View Help DHP128Plus- MainRa... Receive Transmit Status Latency Device Config Network Config ABS67 Config Dante Redundancy Current: Switched New: Switched Switched Redundant

Figure 190. Redundant Mode Configuration in Dante Controller

To configure the DMP 128 Plus AT in redundant mode using DSP Configurator:

1. Use DSP Configurator to connect to the DMP 128 Plus AT in Live mode (see Live and Emulate Panel on page 18).
2. Select Tools > Device Settings.
3. In the Device Settings dialog box, use the right navigation arrow (☐) to navigate to and select the Dante Device tab (see figure 191, ① below).
4. Select Enable Redundant Mode (②).
5. Select DHCP or Static IP and enter a valid redundancy network configuration (③).
6. Click Apply ( 4).

Device Settings Serial Settings Date/Time Dante Device Device name: DMP128Plus-MainRack DHCP Static IP: 192.168.254.254 Subnet: 192.168.254.254 Gateway: 192.168.254.254 DNS: 0.0.0.0 Reboot Dante Refresh Enable Redundant Mode DHCP OK Cancel Apply

Device Settings Serial Settings Date/Time Dante Device Gateway: DNS: 0.0.0.0 Reboot Dante Refresh Enable Redundant Mode DHCP Static IP: Subnet: Gateway: DNS: OK Cancel Apply

Figure 191. Redundant Mode Configuration in DSP Configurator

Dante Controller Operation

Dante Transmitters and Receivers

A Dante network is comprised of transmitters that output digital audio onto the Dante network and receivers that receive digital audio input from the Dante network.

• Transmitters output digital audio from the device onto the audio network.
- Receivers take in digital audio from the audio network into the device.

DMP 128 Plus AT Transmitters and Receivers

In the DMP 128 Plus AT, the line output and EXP output channels are Dante transmitters because their audio output is transmitted onto the Dante network. Routing an analog output to the Dante network allows the signal to be output on both analog and Dante simultaneously, the same is true for the EXP outputs.

The DMP 128 Plus AT EXP input channels are Dante receivers because they receive digital audio signal from the Dante network that can then be routed and mixed into the DMP 128 Plus AT mix matrix.

Dante Routing Operation

Dante Controller is used for all network signal routing of transmitters and receivers for Dante-enabled devices. The DMP 128 Plus AT transmitters and receivers are available in Dante Controller for routing to other Dante devices (see Dante Transmitters and Receivers on the previous page).

Routing Devices

After the DMP 128 Plus AT is configured, the channels can be routed to the other Dante devices on the audio network. Channels transmitted to the network or received from the network are routed using the Dante Controller Routing tab on the Network View page (see figure 192 on the next page). The transmitters, listed horizontally along the top of the screen, and the receivers, listed vertically down the left side, form a matrix whose intersections are the connection points between the receivers and transmitters.

• To make a receiver-to-transmitter connection, click once on an intersection.
• To remove a connection, click on the icon at the intersection.

One of the following icons appears at each connection intersection, indicating the status of both the transmitter and receiver channels and the connections (subscriptions):

Icon D	Description
	Indicates an active subscription.
	Indicates subscription is in progress.
	Indicates a pending subscription.
	Indicates a broken subscription.
	Indicates the transmitting device has been removed from the network or is switched off.

See the Dante Controller User Guide, available at www.audinate.com, for additional information.

Creating Subscriptions Between Transmitters and Receivers

1. Ensure the control computer and DMP 128 Plus AT are connected to the same network.
2. From the start menu select:

All Programs > Audinate > Dante Controller > Dante Controller

The Dante Controller - Network View screen opens (see figure 192 on the next page).

Dante Controller auto-discovers Dante devices on the network and advertises itself to allow other Dante-enabled devices to communicate with it. Transmitters connect to receivers using the subscription matrix.

Dante Controller - Network View File Device View Help Haster Clock: DHP128Plus-MainRack Routing Device Info Click Status Network Status Events Dante™ Filter Transmitters Filter Receivers Dante Receivers AXI27D-ConfRm1 AXI27D-ConfRm2 DHP128Plus-MainRack Exp_In-01 Exp_In-02 Exp_In-03 Exp_In-04 Exp_In-05 Exp_In-06 Exp_In-07 Exp_In-08 Exp_In-09 Exp_In-10 Exp_In-11 Exp_In-12 Exp_In-13 Exp_In-14 Exp_In-15 P: Multicast Bandwidth: 0 bps Event Log: Clock Status Monitor:

Figure 192. Routing Tab of Network View Screen

1. To show the transmitters of a Dante device, click the + box next to the desired device in the Dante Transmitters panel, such as AXI22D-ConfRm1 (see figure 192, ① above). The + changes to a - sign when the device expands.
2. To show the receivers of a Dante device, click the + box next to the desired device in the Dante Receivers panel, such as DMP128Plus-MainRack (2).
3. Click the intersection of the desired subscription between a transmitter and a receiver (3).

Example: The mic/line input transmitters of the AXI22D-ConfRm1 and AXI22D-ConfRm2 are routed to the EXP input receivers of the DMP128Plus-MainRack.

A check mark at the intersection indicates the subscription is made. A check mark also appears next to the receiver channel.

NOTE: A receiver can connect to only one transmitter. A transmitter can connect to multiple receivers.

Disconnecting Inputs from Outputs

To undo routing, click the junction again to disconnect the receiver from the transmitter.

NOTE: After making changes to Dante network routing such as subscriptions, device names, or channel labels, wait at least 5 seconds before disconnecting or powering down the devices. This ensures that the new information is properly saved to those devices. Device level configuration such as sample rates, latency, and clock settings are saved instantly.

Dante Troubleshooting

The most common Dante troubleshooting issues occur when devices are not discovered by Dante Controller or when routing is not successful. Both issues occur when software is not able to properly discover devices operating on the Dante network.

Before moving into more difficult troubleshooting, shut down Dante Controller and reseat the Ethernet cable connecting the PC to the Dante network and restart Dante Controller. This can be enough for the software to reacquire the Dante network.

If the problem persists, perform the following troubleshooting procedures in the order listed.

Simplifying the Network for Troubleshooting

If further troubleshooting of Dante Controller is necessary, begin by simplifying the network:

1. Bypass network switches by connecting two Dante-compatible units, such as a DMP 128 Plus AT and an AXI 44 AT, via their AT ports.
2. Connect the PC to an unused AT port with an Ethernet cable.
3. Use Dante Controller to check if the issue was resolved before moving on to network interface troubleshooting.
4. If the issue is resolved, add connections and hardware one at a time, checking for proper operation after each addition, until the point of failure is discovered (typically a bad cable or invalid redundant configuration).

Troubleshooting the Network Interface

If the issue is still present, continue to diagnose the PC network connections as described below. Check Dante Controller after each step to see if the problem is resolved.

1. Click the Choose a Dante Interface icon (see figure 193, ① below). The Configure Dante Interfaces dialog box opens.

Dante Controller - Network View File Device View Help Routing Device Info Clock Status Network Status Events

Figure 193. Choose a Dante Interface Icon

Be certain the correct LAN connection is selected (the PC LAN port that is physically connected to the AT network) and note the IP address.

Configure Dante Interfaces Select the network interface that the Dante Controller will use to communicate with other Dante devices: Primary Interface: Local Area Connection IP: 169.254.59.166 MAC: B8:CA:3A:97:74:BE Secondary Interface: None IP: No Address MAC: 00:00:00:00:00:00 Ok

Figure 194. Configure Dante Interfaces Dialog Box

1. If it is on, turn off the PC wireless adapter. Disable all connections except the LAN port connected to the Dante network (verify this is the correct port by checking the IP address shown in the Configure Dante Interfaces dialog).
2. Turn off all anti-virus and firewall software on the computer.
3. Enable DHCP on the remaining network connection. This forces the computer to acquire an IP address from the Dante interface.

NOTE: A DHCP server must be on the network for DHCP to function correctly.

Restarting Dante Controller

If subscriptions or normal operation cannot be restored, restart Dante Controller software. To access the Dante Controller Help file, do any of the following:

• Click the Help icon in the upper-right corner of the Network View screen (see figure 195, ① below).
• Select Help, then Online Help or Offline Help from the menu (2).
• Press the key on the computer keyboard for online help or for offline help.

Dante Controller - Network View File Device View Help About License Online Help F1 Offline Help Shift+F1 Master Clock: DMP128-Top Events Routing Device Int 2 ? ?

Figure 195. Accessing the Dante Help File

Remote Communication and Control

This section describes how to control the DMP 128 Plus with SIS programming and covers the following topics:

• Connection Options
  • Host-to-Device Communications
  • Using the Command and Response Tables
  • Command and Response Table for Basic SIS Commands
  • Command and Response Table for DSP SIS Commands
  • Command and Response Table for VoIP SIS Commands
  • Object ID (OID) Number Tables

Connection Options

The DMP 128 Plus Digital Matrix Processor can be remotely connected via a host computer or other device (such as a control system) attached to the rear panel RS-232 port or LAN port, or the front panel USB Config port.

The DMP 128 Plus can be set up and controlled using SIS commands or DSP Configurator software (see Installation on page 4 for pin assignments and details on the configuration and control port connections. For information on DSP Configurator, see DSP Configurator Software on page 10).

SIS commands can be executed using the Extron DataViewer application available from www.extron.com. The host computer issuing the commands can be connected via the following connections:

• RS-232 Port on the next page
• LAN Port on the next page
• USB Config Port on page 125

RS-232 Port

The DMP 128 Plus has a serial port that can be connected to a host device such as a computer running either the DataViewer or HyperTerminal utilities. The port makes serial control of the DMP 128 Plus possible.

The DMP 128 Plus uses the following RS-232 protocols:

• 38400 baud

- No parity

- 1 stop bit

- 8 data bits - No flow control

NOTES:

• The rear panel configuration port requires 38400 baud communication. This speed is higher than most other Extron products. The DMP 128 Plus control software automatically sets the connection for the appropriate speed. When using DataViewer or similar application, make sure the host PC or control system is set for 38400 baud.
• See Rear Panel Features and Cabling on page 5 for additional details on connecting to the RS-232 port.

LAN Port

The DMP 128 Plus can be connected to an Ethernet LAN or WAN. Communication between the device and the controlling device is via Telnet (a TCP socket using port 23). The Telnet port can be changed, if necessary, via SIS. This connection makes SIS control of the device possible using a computer connected to the same LAN or WAN. The SIS commands and behavior are identical to the commands and behavior the product exhibits when communicating by serial port or USB.

The DMP 128 Plus LAN port defaults are as follows:

IP Address Subnet	Mask Default Gateway	DHCP
192.168.254.254 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 OFF

The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover cable and must be properly terminated for your application.

• Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the DMP 128 Plus.
- Straight-through (Patch) cable — Connection of the DMP 128 Plus to an Ethernet LAN.

RJ-45 Connector

Crossover Cable(for direct connection to a PC)
Pin	End 1Wire Color	Pin	End 2Wire Color
1	white-orange	1	white-green
2	orange	2	green
3	white-green	3	white-orange
4	blue	4	blue
5	white-blue	5	white-blue
6	green	6	orange
7	white-brown	7	white-brown
8	brown	8	brown

T568A T568B

A cable that is wired as TIA/EIA T568A at one end and T568B at the other (Tx and Rx pairs reversed) is a "crossover" cable.

Straight-through Cable(for connection to a switch, hub, or router)
Pin	End 1 Wire Color	Pin	End 2 Wire Color
1	white-orange	1	white-orange
2	orange	2	orange
3	white-green	3	white-green
4	blue	4	blue
5	white-blue	5	white-blue
6	green	6	green
7	white-brown	7	white-brown
8	brown	8	brown

T568B

A cable wired the same at both ends is called a "straight-through" cable because no pin/pair assignments are swapped.

Figure 196. RJ-45 Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments

Establishing a Network Connection via LAN

1. Open a TCP socket to port 23 using the DMP 128 Plus IP address.

NOTE: If the local system administrators have not changed the value, the factory specified default, 192.168.254.254, is the correct value for this field.

1. The DMP 128 Plus responds with a copyright message including the date, the name of the product, firmware version, part number, and the current date/time.
2. If the device is password protected, enter the appropriate administrator or user password.

a. If the password is accepted, the device responds with Login User or Login Administrator.

b. If the password is not accepted, the Password prompt reappears.

NOTES:

• The Ethernet link times out after a designated period of time of no communications. By default, the timeout value is set to 5 minutes and can be changed (see Set global IP port timeout on page 129).
• Extron recommends leaving the default timeout at 5 minutes and periodically issuing the Query (Q) command to keep the connection active. If there are long idle periods, disconnect the socket and reopen the connection when another command must be sent.

USB Config Port

The DMP 128 Plus has a front panel USB port that can be connected to a computer as a host device running either the HyperTerminal or DataViewer utilities for control of the device. Once a connection is established, SIS programming can begin (see Host-to-Device Communications on the next page).

Verbose Modes

Telnet connections are used to monitor changes that occur, such as commands from other Telnet sockets or a serial port. For a Telnet session to receive change notices, the Telnet session must be in verbose mode 1 or 3 (see Set verbose mode on page 132). In verbose mode 1 or 3, the Telnet socket reports changes in messages that resemble SIS command responses.

Tagged and Untagged Responses

When a query command is sent in verbose mode 0 or 1, only the “untagged” value is returned. When a query command is sent in other verbose modes, the response is “tagged” and resembles the response to a set command.

Example: The gain query command EscG40000AU← is sent. The following responses appear depending on the verbose mode:

• Untagged (verbose 0 or 1): 626←, just the gain value with no other information.
• Tagged (verbose 2 or 3): DsG40000*626←, the type of query sent, the OID queried, and the gain value.

NOTE: All query responses listed in this guide are untagged.

Host-to-Device Communications

The commands listed in the following tables perform the same functions, but are encoded differently to accommodate the requirements of each Telnet or browser port.

DMP 128 Plus-initiated Messages

The DMP 128 Plus initiates messages under specific conditions. No response is required for the host. The DMP 128 Plus-initiated messages are listed below.

Copyright Message

The DMP 128 Plus initiates the following copyright message when it is first powered on or when a connection via IP is established:

(c) Copyright 2016–2018, Extron Electronics, DMP 128 Plus {model}, Vn.nn, 60-nnnn-nn

Day, DD MMM YYYY HH:MM:SS

• Vn.nn is the firmware version number.
  • {model} is the full model name. DMP 128 Plus C, for example.
• 60-nnnn-nn is the DMP 128 Plus part number.

The DMP 128 Plus sends the boot and copyright messages under the following circumstances:

• If the DMP 128 Plus is off and RS-232 connection is already set up (the PC is cabled to the DMP 128 Plus and a serial communication program such as DataViewer is open), the connected unit sends these messages via RS-232 when first powered on.
• The DMP 128 Plus sends the boot and copyright messages when a Telnet connection to the DMP 128 Plus is opened via Telnet, but not via RS-232. If using a Telnet connection, the copyright message, date, and time may be followed by a password prompt.

Password Prompt

The ←Password prompt requires an administrator or user password followed by a carriage return. The prompt is repeated if the incorrect password is entered.

If the correct password is entered, the unit responds with ←Login Administrator← or ←Login User← depending on the password entered. If passwords are the same for both administrator and user, the unit will default to administrator privileges.

Using the Command and Response Tables

SIS commands consist of a string (one or more characters per command field). No special characters are required to begin or end a command sequence. When the DMP 128 Plus determines a command is valid, it executes the command and sends a response to the host device. All responses end with a carriage return and a line feed, signaling the end of the response character string.

When programming, certain characters are more conveniently represented by their hexadecimal rather than ASCII values. The table below shows the hexadecimal equivalent of each ASCII character:

ASCII to HEX Conversion Table								Esc 1B	CR ∅D	LF ∅A
Space	20	!	21	“	22	#	23	$ 24	% 25	& 26
(	28	)	29	*	2A	+	2B	, 2C	- 2D	• 2E
∅	30	1	31	2	32	3	33	4 34	5 35	6 36
8	38	9	39	:	3A	;	3B	< 3C	= 3D	> 3E
@	40	A	41	B	42	C	43	D 44	E 45	F 46
H	48	I	49	J	4A	K	4B	L 4C	M 4D	N 4E
P	50	Q	51	R	52	S	53	T 54	U 55	V 56
X	58	Y	59	Z	5A	[	5B	\ 5C]	] 5D	^ 5E
、	60	a	61	b	62	c	63	d 64	e 65	f 66
h	68	i	69	j	6A	k	6B	l 6C	m 6D	n 6E
p	70	q	71	r	72	s	73	t 74	u 75	v 76
x	78	y	79	z	7A	{	7B	| 7C}	7D	~ 7E

Figure 197. ASCII to Hex Conversion Table

The Command and Response tables list valid ASCII commands, the DMP 128 Plus responses to the host, and descriptions of the command functions with the results of executing the commands.

Symbol Definitions

← = Carriage return (with line feed)
← = Carriage return (no line feed)
- = Space character
= Pipe (can be used interchangeably with the ← character)
Esc = Escape key
W = Can be used interchangeably with the Esc character.

NOTES:

• Only instances marked with a • character require a space. Any spaces between characters in the command and response tables are only inserted for ease of reading.
• Unless stated otherwise, SIS commands are not case sensitive.

Error Responses

When the DMP 128 Plus is unable to execute the command, it returns an error response to the host. The error response codes and their descriptions are as follows:

E10 — Unrecognized command E24 — Privilege violation

E12 — Invalid port number E25 — Device not present

E13 — Invalid parameter E26 — Maximum number of connections

exceeded

E14 — Not valid for this configuration E27 — Invalid event number

E17 — Invalid command for signal type E28 — Bad filename or file not found

E18 — System/command timed out E31 — Attempt to break port pass-

through when not set

E22 — Busy

Simple Control Port Commands

Upper and lower case text can be used interchangeably except where noted. Port 23 is the default port for Telnet. Port 80 is the default port for web browsers. Both can be mapped to different ports.

Command and Response Table Sections

Command and Response Table for Basic SIS Commands

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
Information requests
General information	I	VnnXnn•A12x08•E16x16←	Response will vary depending on model.
Model name	1I	DMP 128 Plus←	Response varies depending on model.
Model description	2I Digital audio	matrix processor←	Response will vary depending on model.
System memory usage	3IBytes Usedout ofKBytes←
User memory usage	4IBytes Usedout ofKBytes←
Query firmware version	Q	{version x.xx}←
Query firmware version with build	*Q	{version x.xx.xxxx}←
Query kernel/library version	**Q	{version x.xx.xxxxLX}←
Query firmware version (advanced)	X45Q	{specific version info}←	See X45 below.
Query part number	N	ZZ-ZZZZ-ZZ←
Ethernet Data Port
Set current connected port timeout	Esc∅*X26TC←	Pti∅*X26←
View current connected port timeout	Esc∅TC←X26←
Set global IP port timeout	Esc1*X26TC←Pti1*X26←
View global IP port timeout	Esc1TC←X26←

KEY:

X26 = IP Timeout The number of seconds before timeout on IP connections (min=1, max=65000 and default = 30 (300 seconds)

X45 = Firmware Query 0 = Detailed version information (includes all 2Q, 3Q, and 4Q) 1 = Firmware version 2 = Final stage bootloader 3 = Factory base code version 4 = Updated firmware version

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
Serial Data Port
Configure parameters	Esc X1 * X12, X13, X14, X28CP←	Cpn X1 • Ccp X12, X13,X14, X28←
View parameters	Esc X1 CP←	X12, X13, X14, X28←
View mode	Esc X1 CY← X16←
Configure flow control	Esc X1 * X17, X18 CF←	Cpn X1 • Cf1 X17, X18←
View flow control	Esc X1 CF← X17, X18←

KEY:

[X1] = Port Number 01 (always 01 for DMP 128 Plus)
[X12] = Baud Rate	300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600 (default),14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200.
[X13] = Parity Odd, Even, None (default), Mark, Space. Only use the first letter.
[X14] = Data Bits 7, 8 (default)
[X16] = Port Type 0 = RS-232 (default)
[X17] = Flow Control	Hardware, Software, None (default). Only use the first letter.
[X18] = Data Pacing	Specified in milliseconds between bytes. 0000-1000ms (defaultis 0 ms). For host port or ports, this value is ignored and alwaysreturns a 0.
[X22] = Serial Port	1-n = Redirect serial port data from the specified port to allow for atransparent pass through mode.
[X24] = Wait Time	Time in 10s of milliseconds to wait for receive data before releasingthe port to another source (min = 1, max = 650000, anddefault = 10 (100ms).
[X28] = Stop Bits	1 (default) or 2.

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
IP Setup Commands
Set unit name	EscX3CN← Ipn●X3←
Set unit name to factory default	Esc●CN← Ipn●X21←
View unit name	EscCN← X3←
Set date/time	EscX4CT← Ipt●X4←
View date/time	EscCT← X4←
View date/time in hex	Esc*CT← X25←
View GMT offset	EscCZ← X2←
Set DHCP on	Esc1DH← Idh1←
Set DHCP off	Esc∅DH← Idh∅←
View DHCP mode	EscDH← X120←
Set IP address	EscX5CI← Ipi●X5←
View IP address	EscCI← X5←
View hardware address (MAC)	EscCH← X6←
		In verbose modes 2 and 3: IphX6←
Set subnet mask	EscX7CS← Ips●X7←
View subnet mask	EscCS← X7←
Set gateway IP address	EscX5CG← Ipg●X5←
View gateway IP address	EscCG← X5←

KEY:

X2 = GMT Offset Value This represents hours and minutes (hh:mm) offset from Greenwich Mean Time.

[X3] = Unit Name A text string up to 63 characters drawn from the alphabet (A-Z), digits (0-9), and minus sign/hyphen (-).

[X4] = Local Date and Time MM/DD/YY-HH:MM:SS Format

X5 = IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Leading zeros in each of the 4 fields are optional in setting values and are suppressed in responses.

X6 = Hardware MAC Address 00-05-A6-xx-xx-xx

☒7 = Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Leading zeros in each of the 4 fields are optional in setting values and are suppressed in responses.

X21 = Default Name Combination of unit model name and last 3 pars of MAC address.

X25 = Date and Time in Hex Date and time returned in 7 hex bytes (month, day, year, hour, minutes, seconds, and day of the week with Sunday = 1).

X47 = Prefix (subnet mask bits) Subnet 255.255.0.0 is represented as a Prefix value of /16.

[X120] = DHCP Status = off (default), 1 = on

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
IP Setup Commands (continued)
Set IP	EscX46*X5CISG←	Cisg●X46*X5/X47*X5←	In all CISG commands, the first X5 represents the IP address, X47 represents the subnet mask, and the second X5 represents the gateway IP address.
Set IP/subnet	EscX46*X5/X47CISG←	Cisg●X46*X5/X47*X5←
Set IP/subnet/gateway (all)	EscX46*X5/X47*X5CISG←	Cisg●X46*X5/X47*X5←
View IP/subnet/gateway (all)	EscX46CISG←	X46*X5/X47*X5←
Set DNS server IP address	EscX5DI←Ipd●X5←
View DNS server IP address	EscDI←X5←
Set verbose mode	EscX10CV←VrbX10←
View Verbose mode	EscCV←X10←
Get connection count	EscCC←{number of connections}←
Password and Security Settings
Set admin password	EscX19CA←Ipa●X20←
Clear admin password	Esc●CA←Ipa●←
View admin password	EscCA←X20←
Set user password	EscX19CU←Ipu●X20←
Clear user password	Esc●CU←Ipu●←
View user password	EscCU←X20←
Query session's security level	EscCK←X23←

KEY:

X5	=	IP Address	xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx . Leading zeros in each of the 4 fields are optional in setting values and are suppressed in responses.
X10	=	Verbose/Response Mode	∅ = Clear/none (default for Telnet/IP)1 = Verbose mode (default for RS-232 and USB)2 = Tagged responses for queries3 = Verbose mode and tagged responses for queries
X19	=	Password Maximum length is 12 characters. “/”, “\”, “|”, “”, and “*” are not permitted.
X20	=	Reading Password	Responds with 4 asterisks (****) if password exists and empty if not, instead of actual password.
X23	=	Connection Security Level	11 = User12 = Administrator
X46	=	NIC Number	Network Interface Card number 1 or 2 (only V models have 2 NICs)

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
Directories
Change/Create directory	Esc path/directory/CJ←	Dir•path/directory/←
Back to root directory	Esc/CJ← Dir•/←
Up one directory	Esc..CJ← Dir•path/directory/←
View current directory	Esc CJ← path/directory/←
File Commands
Erase current directory and contained files	Esc/EF← Ddl←
Erase current directory and subdirectories	Esc//EF← Ddl←
List files from current directory	EscDF←	filenamex•date/time•length←filenamex•date/time•length←	Responses for EscDF←and EscLF← are in the same format.
List files from current directory and below	EscLF←	filenamex•date/time•length←...space_remaining•bytes left←
Load file to user flash memory	Esc+Uffilesize, filename←	Upl←
Retrieve file from user flash memory	EscfilenameSF←	{responds with 4 bytes of file size and unprocessed data in file}
Backup/Restore Device Configuration
Save device configuration (to filesystem)	Esc1*X32 XF←	Cnfg1*X32←
Restore device configuration	Esc∅*X32 XF←	Cnfg ∅ * X32←

KEY: X32 = Configuration type = IP configuration, 2 = device-specific parameters

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
NTP (Network Time Protocol)
Enable NTP to set the time	Esc1NTEN← Nten1←
Disable NTP	Esc0NTEN← Nten0←
Sync NTP now	Esc2NTEN← Nten2←
View NTP status	EscNTEN← X31←
Set NTP IP address	EscX5NTIP← NtipX5←
Clear NTP IP address	Esc●NTIP← Ntip←
View NTP IP address	EscNTIP← X5←
Set NTP port map	EscNX93PMAP← PmapNX93←
Reset NTP port map	EscN123PMAP← PmapN00123←
Disable NTP port	EscN0PMAP← PmapN00000←
View NTP port map	EscNPMAP← X93←
Port Assignment
Set telnet port map	EscX93MT← PmtX93←
Reset telnet port map	Esc23MT← Pmt00023←
Disable telnet port	Esc0MT← Pmt00000←
View telnet port map	EscMT← X93←
Set web port map	EscX93MH← PmhX93←
Reset web port map	Esc80MH← Pmh00080←
Disable web port map	Esc0MH← Pmh00000←
View web port map	EscMH← X93←
Set SNMP port map	EscAX93PMAP← PmapAX93←
Reset SNMP port map	EscA161PMAP← PmapA00161←
Disable SNMP port	EscA0PMAP← PmapA00000←
View SNMP port map	EscAPMAP← X93←
Set SSH port map	EscBX93PMAP← PmapBX93←
Reset SSH port map	EscB22023PMAP← PmapB22023←
Disable SSH port	EscB0PMAP← PmapB00000←
View SSH port map	EscBPMAP← X93←
Set SSL port map	EscSX93PMAP← PmapSX93←
Reset SSL port map	EscS443PMAP← PmapS00443←
Disable SSL port	EscS0PMAP← PmapS00000←

KEY:

X5	=	IP Address	xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Leading zeros in each of the 4 fields are optional in setting values.
X31	=	NTP Status	∅ = disabled (default), 1 = enabled.
X93	=	Ethernet Port Number	∅ = off, custom port numbers must be 1024 or higher.

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
Port Assignment (continued)
View SSL port map	EscSPMAP←X93←
Set FTP port map	EscFX93PMAP←PmapFX93←
Reset FTP port map	EscF21PMAP←PmapF00021←
Disable FTP port	EscF0PMAP←PmapF00000←
View FTP port map	EscFPMAP←X93←
Set TFTP port map	EscTX93PMAP←PmapTX93←
Reset TFTP port map	EscT69PMAP←PmapT00069←
Disable TFTP port map	EscT0PMAP←PmapT00000←
View TFTP port map	EscTPMAP←X93←
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
Set unit contact	EscCX48SNMP←SnmpC*X48←
Set unit contact to default	EscC•SNMP←SnmpC*Not•Specified←
View unit contact	EscCSNMP←X48←
Set unit location	EscLX48SNMP←SnmpL*X48←
Set unit location to default	EscL•SNMP←SnmpL*Not•Specified←
View unit location	EscLSNMP←X48←
Set community public (read-only)	EscPX48SNMP←SnmpP*X48←
Set community public to default	EscP•SNMP←SnmpP*public←
View community public	EscPSNMP←X48←
Set community private (read/write)	EscXX48SNMP←SnmpX*X48←
Set community private to default	EscXSNMP•X48←SnmpX*private←
View community private	EscXSNMP←X48←
Enable SNMP access and traps	EscE1SNMP←SnmpE*1←
Disable SNMP access and traps	EscE0SNMP←SnmpE*0←
View SNMP access setting	EscESNMP←X83←

KEY:

X5 = IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Leading zeros in each of the 4 fields are optional in setting values.

48 = Text Up to 64 characters. 83 = SNMP Access = disabled (default), 1 = enabled

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
Reboot Commands
Reboot system	Esc1B00T← Boot1←
Reboot network	Esc2B00T← Boot2←
Serial Host Control Port Mode
Standard host control (SIS)	EscX1*1HSTM← HstmX1*1←
Device control (no SIS)	EscX1*2HSTM← HstmX1*2←
Disable port	EscX1*∅HSTM← HstmX1*∅←
Query port mode	EscX1HSTM← X85←
Ping
Execute test	Esc{address/name}	{address}* {bytes}*
	PING←	{ttl}* {time}←
Example:	Esc192.168.254.254	192.168.254.254*64*
	PING←	64*3.469
If ping fails to get reply from address		{address}*∅*∅*∅←
Timezone and Daylight Settings
Set time zone	Esc{zone name}* TZON←	Tzon•{zone name, description}←
View current time zone	EscTZON←	{zone name, description}←
List all time zones	Esc*TZON←	{zone name, description}←...←...←

KEY:

[X1] = Port Number ∅1 (always ∅1 for DMP 128 Plus)

[X85] = Port Mode 0 = disabled, 1 = standard (default), 2 = device

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
Digital I/O
Get input status	Esc X52 GPIT← X53 * X54←
Get output status	Esc X52 * X55 GPOT← X56 * X57←

NOTE: Variables shown in the table above, but not listed at the bottom of this page, are listed on the next page.

KEY:

X52 = Digital I/O Channel 1 through 8

X53 = Action Type = No action/off

Mutes

1 = Level trigger (low mutes)
2 = Level trigger (high mutes)
3 = Edge trigger (high to low mutes, low to high unmutes)
4 = Edge trigger (high to low unmutes, low to high mutes)
5 = Toggle trigger (high to low toggles mute)
6 = Toggle trigger (low to high toggles mute)

Group Mutes

7 = Level trigger (low mutes)
8 = Level trigger (high mutes)
9 = Edge trigger (high to low mutes, low to high unmutes)
10 = Edge trigger (high to low unmutes, low to high mutes)
11 = Toggle trigger (high to low toggles mute)
12 = Toggle trigger (low to high toggles mute)

Macros

13 = Edge trigger (high to low starts macro)

14 = Edge trigger (low to high starts macro)

Presets

15 = Edge trigger (high to low recalls preset)

16 = Edge trigger (low to high recalls preset)

Mutes

Input number for muting. If X53 is not specified, muting matches the input with the corresponding I/O channel number.

Group Mutes

Group member for muting. If X53 is not specified, muting matches the group with the corresponding I/O channel number.

Macros

Macro number. If 53 is not specified, the macro number defaults to the corresponding I/O channel number.

Presets

Preset number. If X53 is not provided, the preset number defaults to the corresponding I/O channel number.

KEY:

X55 = Digital Output 1 or 2

X56 = Output Mode = Output always high

1 = Output always low

Mutes

2 = Mute high

3 = Unmute high

Group Mutes

4 = Group mute high

5 = Group unmute high

Macros

6 = Macro started set high once (blink)

7 = Macro started set low once (blink)

Presets

8 = Preset recalled set high once (blink)

9 = Preset recalled set low once (blink)

Automix Gate Status

1∅ = Automix gate on (>1024) set high

11 = Automix gate on (>1024) set low

Signal Presence

12 = Signal presence (> -40dBFS) set high

13 = Signal presence (> -40dBFS) set low

X57 = Varies according to output mode

Mutes

Input number for monitoring. If X56 is not specified, monitoring defaults to the input with the corresponding I/O channel number.

Group Mutes

Group member for mute monitoring. If X56 is not specified, muting matches the group with the corresponding I/O channel number.

Macros

Macro number. If X56 is not specified, the macro number defaults to the corresponding I/O channel number.

Presets

Preset number. If X56 is not provided, the preset number defaults to the corresponding I/O channel number.

Automix Gate Status

Input number for automix gate monitoring. If X56 is not specified, the input number defaults to the corresponding I/O channel number.

Signal Presence

Input Number for signal presence monitoring. If 56 is not specified, the input number defaults to the corresponding I/O channel number.

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
Write Names
Write input name	Esc X59, X64 NI←	Nmi X59, X64←
Write virtual return name	Esc X60, X64 NL←	Nml X60, X64←
Write EXP input name	Esc X61, X64 NE←	Nei X61, X64←
Write output name	Esc X62, X64 NO←	Nmo X62, X64←
Write EXP output name	Esc X63, X64 NX←	Nex X63, X64←
Write preset name	Esc X58, X64 NG←	Nmg X58, X64←
View Names
View input name	Esc X59 NI← X64←
View virtual return name	Esc X60 NL← X64←
View EXP input name	Esc X61 NE← X64←
View output name	Esc X62 NO← X64←
View EXP output name	Esc X63 NX← X64←
View preset name	Esc X58 NG← X64←
Recall Presets
Recall Preset	X58. Rpr X58←
Reset to Factory Defaults
Reset presets and names	Esc ZG← Zpg←
Reset individual preset	Esc X58 ZG← Zpg X58←
System reset (factory default)	Esc ZXXX← Zpx←
Reset flash file system	Esc ZFFF← Zpf←
Absolute reset including IP settings	Esc ZQQQ← Zpq←
Reset all device settings and delete files	Esc ZY← Zpy←		Reset excludes IP address, subnet mask, gateway IP address, unit name, DHCP, and port mapping in order to preserve communication with the device.

KEY:

[X58] = Preset number 1 through 32
[X59] = Input number 1 through 20 (inputs 13-20 are Aux inputs)
[X60] = Virtual return number 1 through 16
[X61] = EXP input number 1 through 16 (1 through 48 on DMP 128 Plus AT models)
[X62] = Output number 1 through 12 (outputs 9 through 12 are Aux outputs)
[X63] = EXP output number 1 through 16
[X64] = New Name Invalid characters = ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ` “ : ; | \ and ? 

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
Player File Management
Set file to slot association	EscAX66*X65CPLY←	CplyAX66*X65←
Clear file to slot association	EscAX66*●CPLY←	CplyAX66*●←
View file to slot association	EscAX66CPLY←X65←
Player Commands
Start playback on a specific player	EscX66*1PLAY←	PlayX66*1←
Stop playback on a specific player	EscX66*∅PLAY←	PlayX66*∅←
Player status	EscX66PLAY←X68←
Set player repeat	EscMX66*X67CPLY←	CplyMX66*X67←	Turning off repeat during playback will stop playback after current playthrough.
Get player repeat status	EscMX66CPLY←X67←
Playthrough finished Unsolicited		PlayX66*∅←
Macro Commands
Run macro	EscRX69MCRO←McroRX69←
Kill macro	EscKX69MCRO←McroKX69←
Get macro status	EscSXX69MCRO←X70←
Set macro name	EscAX69*X71MCRO←	McroAX69*X71←
Get macro name	EscAX69MCRO←X71←
Set power-on macro	EscPXX69MCRO←	McroPXX69←	Using ∅ for X69clears power-on macro assignment.
Get power-on macro	EscPMCRO←	X69←
Asynchronous Macro Responses
Macro started		MicroSTARTED X69←
Macro finished		MicroFINISHED X69←
Macro failed		MicroFAILED X69*X70←
Macro killed		MicroKILLED X69*X70←

KEY:

X65	=	Audio file name	Valid characters are A-Z, a-z, 0-9,_
X66	=	Player ID	1 through 8
X67	=	Repeat status	∅ = Play once, 1 = Repeat
X68	=	Play state	∅ = Stopped, 1 = Playing
X69	=	Macro number	1 through 64. Response will be padded with a leading 0.
X70	=	Macro status	∅ = Macro idle
X71	=	Macro name	24 characters maximum (A-Z, a-z, ∅-9, and “-”)

DSP SIS Commands

Many digital signal processor (DSP) functions such as gain, mute, and group masters can be controlled using SIS commands. These commands follow the same general rules as basic SIS commands but the variables can be more complex. Also, an understanding of the audio signal flow is helpful for using audio DSP SIS commands. The following gain blocks are addressable via SIS commands:

• Mic/Line Input (gain and mute)
• Virtual Return (gain and mute)
• Aux Input (gain, mute, and source)
• Post-mixer (gain only)
- Pre-mixer (gain and mute) - Output (attenuation and mute)
• Mix-points (gain and mute)

Symbol Definitions

← = Carriage return/line feed
← = Carriage return (no line feed)
- = Space character
| = Pipe (can be used interchangeably with the ← character)
Esc = Escape key
W = Can be used interchangeably with the Esc character

X72 = Gain and trim control See Object ID (OID) Number Tables on page 150.
X73 = Level value Level values use a 10x multiplier system to set gain via SIS

command. For example, if the desired gain value is +10.3 dB, the SIS value would be 103 (10.3 x 10), if the desired gain value is -8.2 dB, the SIS value would be -82 (-8.2 x 10), and so on.

-12.0 dB to +12.0 dB, (-120 to 120) in 0.1 dB increments.
-18.0 dB to +80 dB, (-180 to 800) in 0.1 dB increments.
-100.0 dB to +12.0 dB, (-1000 to 120) in 0.1 dB increments.

NOTE: The integers only need to be signed if they are a negative number.

X74 = Mute status = unmute

1 = mute (see Object ID (OID) Number Tables on page 150)

X75 = Group master group number ∅1 through 64
[X76] = Group fader setting dB, value in 0.1 dB increments using a 10x multiplier and

negative numbers, but not decimal places. The valid range depends on the type of gain block that is assigned to the group number 75 specified in the command:

-180 to 800 (-18.0 dB to +80 dB)
-1000 to 120 (-100.0 dB to +12.0 dB)
-1000 to 120 (-100.0 dB to +12.0 dB)
-120 to 120 (-12.0 dB to +12.0 dB)
-1000 to 0 (-100.0 dB to +0.0 dB)

NOTE: Leading zeros are ignored.

X77 = Group fader increment dB value, in 0.1 dB increments, to raise or lower a group fader

X78 = Group fader soft limit dB value, in 0.1 dB increments. The valid range X76 must be within the range for the gain block grouped in X75.

X79 = Group type 6 = gain

12 = mute

Special Characters

The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions. The device will not accept the following characters as a part of preset names, the device names, passwords, or locally created file names.

The DMP 128 rejects the following characters:

{space (OK for names)} + \~ , @ = ' { } [ ] < > ` ` ; : \ ?

Command and Response Table for DSP SIS Commands

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
Audio level control and mix-point selection
NOTE: The command format is the same, regardless of the control being set. The acceptable adjustment range varies depending on the control or mix point.The mic/line input gain range is -18 dB to +80 dB in 0.1 dB increments.The pre-mixer and virtual return gain range is -100 dB to +12 dB in 0.1 dB increments.The post-mixer gain range is -12 dB to +12 dB in 0.1 dB increments. Post mixer trim cannot be muted.The output gain range is -100 dB to 0 dB in 0.1 dB increments.All responses are shown with the DMP 128 in Verbose mode 2 or 3.
Set trim or gain	Esc G X72 * X73 AU←	DSG X72 * X73←	Set gain on OID X72 to a value of X73 dB.
Example 1 (mic/line input 1):	Esc G40000*120 AU←	DSG40000*120←	Set the mic/line input 1 to a level of +12.0 dB.
Example 2 (pre-mixer gain 1):	Esc G40100* -8 AU←	DSG40100* -8←	Set pre-mixer gain 1 to a value of -0.8 dB.
Read trim or gain	Esc G X72 AU←	DSG X72 * X73←	Gain on OID X72 is set to a value of X73 dB.
Example 1 (mic/line input 1):	Esc G40000AU←	DSG40000*550←	Mic/line input 1 gain is set to a value of +55.0 dB.
Example 2 (post-mixer gain 1):	Esc G60100AU←	DSG60100*55←	Output 2, post mixer gain is set to a value of +5.5 dB.
Audio Mute
Audio mute	Esc M X72 *1AU←	DSM X72 *1←	Mute audio at X72.
Audio unmute	Esc M X72 *0AU←	DSM X72 *0←	Unmute audio at X72.
Mute status	Esc M X72 AU←	DSM X72 *X74←
Phantom Power
Enable phantom power	Esc Z X72 *1AU←	Dsz X72 *1←	Phantom power is only available on mic/line inputs 1 through 8.
Disable phantom power	Esc Z X72 *0AU←	Dsz X72 *0←
Phantom power status	Esc Z X72 AU←	Dsz X72 *X74←

KEY:

X72	=	Target OID	SeeObject ID (OID) Number Tableson page 150
X73	=	Level value: mic/line gain, pre-mixer gain, virtual return gain, post-mixer trim, and output volume.	Levels use a 10x multiplier system with no decimal spaces. For example, a level of +10.4 dB would be entered as 104and a level of -3.2 dB would be entered as -32.
X74	=	Mute/Phantom power status	= disabled1 = enabled

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
Audio Group Master Commands
NOTES:For information on configuring groups, seeGroupson page 69.A group must have assigned members for these commands to have an effect.ForX76, a positive (+) value is assumed unless a negative (-) value is specified.If entering anX76value outside the valid range for the group or outside the soft limits, the DMP 128 responds with anE13 error (invalid parameter).X76, X77, and X78values can be sent without leading zeroes. Responses are always 5 digits in length.
Set a group fader value	EscD X75* X76 GRPM←	GrpmD X75* X76←	Set a group fader to a value ofX76.
Example:	EscD2* - 239GRPM←	GrpmD2* - 293←	Set group 2 fader control to -29.3 dB.
Increment a group fader value	EscD X75* X77+GRPM←	GrpmD X75* X76←	Increase the level ofX75byX77dB.
Example:	EscD2*30+GRPM←	GrpmD2* - 263←	Raise the group 2 fader 3 dB from -29.3 dB (set in example above) to -26.3 dB.
Decrement a group fader value	EscD X75* X77- GRPM←	GrpmD X75* X76←	Decrease the level of theX75group fader byX77dB.
View the group fader value	EscD X75 GRPM←	GrpmD X75* X76←	In verbose modes 0 and 1, the response is simplified toX76←.
Mute a group	EscD X75* 1 GRPM←	GrpmD X75* 1←	Mute all blocks in groupX75.
Unmute a group	EscD X75*∅GRPM←	GrpmD X75*∅←	Unmute all blocks in groupX75.
View a group mute value	EscD X75 GRPM←	GrpmD X75* X74←	For group masters,X74is always expressed as an unsigned or negative value.

KEY:

X74	=	Mute status	∅ = unmuted1 = muted
X75	=	Group master group number	1 through 64
X76	=	Group fader level	dB value in 0.1 dB steps, using negative numbers and eliminating decimal places using a 10x multiplier. -100.0dB to +80.0 dB is represented by -1000 to 800. The valid range depends on the type of gain or trim block assigned to the group number (X75).
X77	=	Group fader increase/decrease	dB value in 0.1 dB steps to raise or lower a group fader. Gain uses 10x multiplier (+10 dB = 100+). + or - goes after the number.

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response(device to host)	Additional description
Audio Group Master Commands (continued)
Set soft limits	EscL 75 * 78 upper*	GrpmL 75 * 78 * 78 ←	Set the groups soft limits to 78 upperand 78 lower.
	78 lowerGRPM←
Example:	EscL2*60*-60 GRPM←	GrpmL2*60*-60←	Set the upper soft limit forthe group 2 fader to +6.0dB and the lower limit to-6.0 dB.
View soft limits	EscL 75 GRPM←	GrpmL 75 * 78 * 78 ←	In verbose modes 0 and 1,the response is simplifiedto 78 * 78 ←.
View group type	EscP 75 GRPM←	GrpmP 75 * 79 ←
View group members	EscO 75 GRPM←	GrpmO 75 * 72 ^1 * 72 ^2 *...* 72 ^16 ←	72 is the control address.In verbose modes 0 and 1,the response is simplifiedto 72 ^1 * 72 ^2 *...* 72 ^16 ←

KEY:

X72 = Target OID See Object ID (OID) Number Tables on page 150
X75 = Group master group number 1 through 64
X78 = Group fader soft limit dB value in 0.1 dB steps. Gain uses 10x multiplier (+10 dB = 100+).
X79 = Group type 6 = gain 12 = mute 

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
Auxiliary Input 1 through 8
Set source mode	EscDX72*X87AU←	DsDX72*X87←
Get source mode	EscDX72AU←X87←
Set mute	EscMX72*X74AU←	DsMX72*X74←
Get mute status	EscMX72AU←X74←
Set analog gain	EscGX72*X73AU←	DSGX72*X73←
Read gain	EscGX72AU←X73←
Auxiliary Output 1 through 8
Set output mode	EscDX72*X90AU←	DsDX72*X90←
Get output mode	EscDX72AU←X90←
Set mute	EscMX72*X74AU←	DsMX72*X74←
Get mute status	EscMX72AU←X74←
Set attenuation	EscGX72*X73AU←	DsGX72*X73←
Read attenuation level	EscGX72AU←X73←
Metering
NOTE: Metering is available on all input, pre-mixer, and output gain blocks.
Read meter level	EscVX72AU←X88*X89←		-150.0 dBFS to 0.0 dBFS
Enable meter updates	EscVX72*X88AU←	DsVX72*X88←
Automixer Gate Monitoring
Get current automixer gate status	EscJX72AU←X91←
Unsolicited automixer gate status update	This is enabled by selecting the Automix dialogMonitor Gate checkbox(seeInput Automix Blockon page 40).	DsVX72*X92*X95*X96←
Signal Level Monitoring (SLM)
SLM tracks when the signal at a metered gain OID crosses a set threshold level. When SLM is enabled for an OID, an unsolicited message is sent when the threshold level is crossed. The response includes the OID, meter on/off status, level after the threshold was crossed, and if the level was going up or down when the threshold was crossed.
Set SLM status	EscJX72*X94AU←	DsJX72*X94←
Get current threshold status	EscJX72 AU←X94←
Unsolicited meter value		DsVX72*X92*X95*X96←

KEY:

- Variables not defined on this page are defined on the following page.

X72 = Target OID See Object ID (OID) Number Tables on page 150

73 = Gain value dB value in 0.1 dB steps. Gain uses 10x multiplier (+10 dB = 100, -3.4 dB = -34, and so on).

[X74] = Mute status = off, 1 = engaged

KEY:

X87 = Source mode
0 = disabled
1 = File/Tone Playback: Player 1
2 = File/Tone Playback: Player 2
3 = File/Tone Playback: Player 3
4 = File/Tone Playback: Player 4
5 = File/Tone Playback: Player 5
6 = File/Tone Playback: Player 6
7 = File/Tone Playback: Player 7
8 = File/Tone Playback: Player 8
9 = USB 1 Rx: Left Channel
10 = USB 1 Rx: Right Channel
11 = USB 2 Rx: Left Channel
12 = USB 2 Rx: Right Channel
17 = VoIP Line 1 Rx
18 = VoIP Line 2 Rx
19 = VoIP Line 3 Rx
20 = VoIP Line 4 Rx
21 = VoIP Line 5 Rx
22 = VoIP Line 6 Rx
23 = VoIP Line 7 Rx
24 = VoIP Line 8 Rx

X88 = Updates status 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled
X89 = Meter level -150.0 dBFS to 0.0 dBFS (1500 to 0000)
X90 = Output mode
0 = disabled
1 = USB 1 Tx: Left Channel
2 = USB 1 Tx: Right Channel
3 = USB 2 Tx: Left Channel
4 = USB 2 Tx: Right Channel
9 = VoIP Line 1 Tx
10 = VoIP Line 2 Tx
11 = VoIP Line 3 Tx
12 = VoIP Line 4 Tx
13 = VoIP Line 5 Tx
14 = VoIP Line 6 Tx
15 = VoIP Line 7 Tx
16 = VoIP Line 8 Tx

X91 = Gate monitoring status
0 = gate monitoring disabled, 1024 = gate monitoring enabled
X92 = Meter status 0 = meter off, 1 = meter on
X93 = Signal level when gate is opened or closed
0000 - 1023 = gate closed, ≥1024 = gate open (see Automixer Gate Monitoring on page 42 for more information).
X94 = Monitoring threshold
0 = disabled, 0001-2000 = signal threshold to monitor (-0.1 to -200.0 dBFS).
X95 = Meter value 0000-2000 = 0.0 to -200.0 dBFS
X96 = Meter relative to threshold
0 = above threshold, 1 = equal to or below threshold 

Command and Response Table for VoIP SIS Commands

NOTE: All SIS responses in this section are in Verbose modes 2 and 3. In Verbose modes 0 or 1, responses will not be tagged.

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
Call Control
End call	Esc END 1,2 VOIP←	VoipEND 1,2,4 ←
End call on all appearances	Esc END 1 VOIP←	VoipEND 1,1,4 ←
Dial string	Esc DIAL 1,3 VOIP←	VoipDIAL 1,3,4 ←
Dial digits	Esc DD 1,2,3 VOIP←	VoipDD 1,2,3,4 ←
Answer	Esc ANS 1,2 VOIP←	VoipANS 1,2,4 ←
Reject	Esc REJ 1,2 VOIP←	VoipREJ 1,2,4 ←
Hold	Esc HOLD 1,2,24 VOIP←	VoipHOLD 1,2,24,4 ←
Call Settings
Set do not disturb	Esc DND 1,7 VOIP←	VoipDND 1,7 ←
Get do not disturb status	Esc DND 1 VOIP←	VoipDND 1,7 ←
Set auto answer	Esc AA 1,8 VOIP←	VoipAA 1,8 ←
Get auto answer status	Esc AA 1 VOIP←	VoipAA 1,8 ←
Set auto answer delay	Esc AD 1,9 VOIP←	VoipAD 1,9 ←
Get auto answer delay status	Esc AD 1 VOIP←	VoipAD 1,9 ←

KEY:

X1 = Line number 1 through 8
X2 = Appearance number 1 through 8 (where 1 is the originating two-party call)
X3 = Phone number No spaces allowed. Valid characters are ∅ - 9, *, #
X4 = Return code ∅ = ok, 1 = fail
X7 = Operating state 1 = enable, ∅ = disable
X8 = Auto answer mode ∅ = disabled, 1 = delay (seconds), 2 = follow SIP header
X9 = Delay value Represents time in seconds.
X24 = Hold status ∅ = off, 1 = on-hold 

Command ASCII command	(host to device)	Response (device to host)	Additional description
Unsolicited Responses
Busy		VoipBusy 1 , 2
Rejected		VoipRejected 1 , 2
Unreachable		VoipUnreachable 1 , 2
Terminated		VoipTerminated 1 , 2
Incoming		VoipIncoming 1 , 2 , 10 , 23 , 11
Registration status		VoipRS 1 , 12
Line Status		VoipLS 1 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 11	Each 14 entry represents an appearance of the line.
Line Status Queries (get only)
Registration status	EscRS 1 VOIP←	VoipRS 1 , 12
Line status	EscLS 1 , 2 VOIP←	VoipLS 1 , 2 , 14
Line status (without index)	EscLS 1 VOIP←	VoipLS 1 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 14 , 11	Each X14 entry represents an appearance of the line.
Caller name	EscNAME 1 , 2 VOIP←	VoipNAME 1 , 2 , 10 , 23
Duration	EscDUR 1 , 2 VOIP←	VoipDUR 1 , 2 , 16
Codec	EscCD 1 , 2 VOIP←	VoipCD 1 , 2 , 17
Jitter Rx	EscJR 1 , 2 VOIP←	VoipJR 1 , 2 , 18 , 19 , 22
Line Extension	EscLE 1 VOIP←	VoipLE 1 , 23 , 10
KEY:
1 = Line number 1 - 8 2 = Appearance number 1 - 8 (where 1 is the originating two-party call) 10 = Display name Any commas returned will be displayed as hyphens (-) 11 = Timestamp Example: Date: Thu, 08 Sep 2017 16:24:35 GMT 12 = Registration status = Unregistered, = Registered to 1st proxy, = Registered to 2nd proxy, 3 = None, = Not registered (failed) 14 = Call status = None, 1 = Inactive, 2 = Active, 3 = On Hold, 4 = Incoming, 5 = Outgoing 16 = Duration HH:MM:SS 17 = Codec name Alphanumeric characters only 18 = Jitter in milliseconds 19 = Packet drop count 22 = Total packet count 23 = Extension number Valid characters are - 9, *, #

Object ID (OID) Number Tables

The following tables list input and output gain OIDs. For mix-point OID tables, see Mix-point OIDs on page 154.

Input Path OIDs

Mic/Line Input Gain Block	OID Mic	Line Pre-mixer Gain Block	OID
Mic/Line Input 1 40000 Mic/Line Input 1	40100
Mic/Line Input 2 40001 Mic/Line Input 2	40101
Mic/Line Input 3 40002 Mic/Line Input 3	40102
Mic/Line Input 4 40003 Mic/Line Input 4	40103
Mic/Line Input 5 40004 Mic/Line Input 5	40104
Mic/Line Input 6 40005 Mic/Line Input 6	40105
Mic/Line Input 7 40006 Mic/Line Input 7	40106
Mic/Line Input 8 40007 Mic/Line Input 8	40107
Mic/Line Input 9 40008 Mic/Line Input 9	40108
Mic/Line Input 10 40009 Mic/Line Input 10	40109
Mic/Line Input 11 40010 Mic/Line Input 11	40110
Mic/Line Input 12 40011 Mic/Line Input 12	40111

Aux Input Gain Block OID Aux Input		Pre-mixerGain Block	OID
Aux Input 1 40012 Aux Input 1 40112
Aux Input 2 40013 Aux Input 2 40113
Aux Input 3 40014 Aux Input 3 40114
Aux Input 4 40015 Aux Input 4 40115
Aux Input 5 40016 Aux Input 5 40116
Aux Input 6 40017 Aux Input 6 40117
Aux Input 7 40018 Aux Input 7 40118
Aux Input 8 40019 Aux Input 8 40119

Virtual Return Pre-mixer Gain Block	OID Virtual Pre-mixer Gain Block		OID
Virtual Return A 50100 Virtual Return I 50108
Virtual Return B 50101 Virtual Return J 50109
Virtual Return C 50102 Virtual Return K	50110
Virtual Return D 50103 Virtual Return L 50111
Virtual Return E 50104 Virtual Return M 50112
Virtual Return F	50105 Virtual Return N		50113
Virtual Return G	50106 Virtual Return O 50114
Virtual Return H 50107 Virtual Return P	50115
Expansion InputPre-mixer Gain Block	OID Expansion InputPre-mixer Gain Block		OID
EXP In 1 50200 EXP In 9 50208
EXP In 2 50201 EXP In 10 50209
EXP In 3 50202 EXP In 11 50210
EXP In 4 50203 EXP In 12 50211
EXP In 5 50204 EXP In 13 50212
EXP In 6 50205 EXP In 14 50213
EXP In 7 50206 EXP In 15 50214
EXP In 8 50207 EXP In 16 50215

Output Path OIDs

Line Output Post-mixer Trim Block	OID Line	Output Attenuation Block	OID
Line Output 1 60100 Line Output 1 60000
Line Output 2 60101 Line Output 2 60001
Line Output 3 60102 Line Output 3 60002
Line Output 4 60103 Line Output 4 60003
Line Output 5 60104 Line Output 5 60004
Line Output 6 60105 Line Output 6 60005
Line Output 7 60106 Line Output 7 60006
Line Output 8 60107 Line Output 8 60007

Aux Output Post-mixer Trim Block	OID Aux	Output Gain Block OID
Aux Output 1 60108 Aux Output 1 60008
Aux Output 2 60109 Aux Output 2 60009
Aux Output 3 60110 Aux Output 3 60010
Aux Output 4 60111 Aux Output 4 60011
Aux Output 5 60112 Aux Output 5 60012
Aux Output 6 60113 Aux Output 6 60013
Aux Output 7 60114 Aux Output 7 60014
Aux Output 8 60115 Aux Output 8 60015
EXP Output Post-mixer Trim Block	OID EXP	Output Post-mixer Trim Block	OID
EXP Output 1 60116 EXP	Output 9 6012	4
EXP Output 2 60117 EXP	Output 10 601	25
EXP Output 3 60118 EXP	Output 11 601	26
EXP Output 4 60119 EXP	Output 12 601	27
EXP Output 5 60120 EXP	Output 13 601	28
EXP Output 6 60121 EXP	Output 14 601	29
EXP Output 7 60122 EXP	Output 15 601	30
EXP Output 8 60123 EXP	Output 16 601	31

EXP Output Attenuation Block	OID EXP	Output Attenuation Block	OID
EXP Output 1 60016 EXP	Output 9 60024
EXP Output 2 60017 EXP	Output 10 60025
EXP Output 3 60018 EXP	Output 11 60026
EXP Output 4 60019 EXP	Output 12 60027
EXP Output 5 60020 EXP	Output 13 60028
EXP Output 6 60021 EXP	Output 14 60029
EXP Output 7 60022 EXP	Output 15 60030
EXP Output 8 60023 EXP	Output 16 60031

Automixer OIDs

Mic/Line Input Automixer OID	OID Mic	Line Input Automixer OID	OID
Mic/Line Automixer 1 59000	Mic/Line Automixer 7 59006
Mic/Line Automixer 2 59001	Mic/Line Automixer 8 59007
Mic/Line Automixer 3 59002	Mic/Line Automixer 9 59008
Mic/Line Automixer 4 59003	Mic/Line Automixer 10 59009
Mic/Line Automixer 5 59004	Mic/Line Automixer 11 59010
Mic/Line Automixer 6 59005	Mic/Line Automixer 12 59011

Aux Input Automixer OID	OID Aux	Input Automixer OID	OID
Aux Automixer 1 59012 Aux	Automixer 5	59016
Aux Automixer 2 59013 Aux	Automixer 6	59017
Aux Automixer 3 59014 Aux	Automixer 7	59018
Aux Automixer 4 59015 Aux	Automixer 8	59019
EXP Input Automixer OID	OID EXP	Input Automixer OID	OID
EXP Automixer 1 59020 EXP Automixer	9	59028
EXP Automixer 2 59021 EXP Automixer	10	59029
EXP Automixer 3 59022 EXP Automixer	11	59030
EXP Automixer 4 59023 EXP Automixer	12	59031
EXP Automixer 5 59024 EXP Automixer	13	59032
EXP Automixer 6 59025 EXP Automixer	14	59033
EXP Automixer 7 59026 EXP Automixer	15	59034
EXP Automixer 8 59027 EXP Automixer	16	59035

EXP Input Automixer OID	OID EXP	Input Automixer OID	OID
EXP Automixer 17 59036	EXP Automixer	25 59044
EXP Automixer 18 59037	EXP Automixer	26 59045
EXP Automixer 19 59038	EXP Automixer	27 59046
EXP Automixer 20 59039	EXP Automixer	28 59047
EXP Automixer 21 59040	EXP Automixer	29 59048
EXP Automixer 22 59041	EXP Automixer	30 59049
EXP Automixer 23 59042	EXP Automixer	31 59050
EXP Automixer 24 59043	EXP Automixer	32 59051

EXP Input Automixer OID	OID EXP	Input Automixer OID	OID
EXP Automixer 33 59052	EXP Automixer	41 59060
EXP Automixer 34 59053	EXP Automixer	42 59061
EXP Automixer 35 59054	EXP Automixer	43 59062
EXP Automixer 36 59055	EXP Automixer	44 59063
EXP Automixer 37 59056	EXP Automixer	45 59064
EXP Automixer 38 59057	EXP Automixer	46 59065
EXP Automixer 39 59058	EXP Automixer	47 59066
EXP Automixer 40 59059	EXP Automixer	48 59067

NOTE: Automixer OIDs are used only to read unsolicited automixer gate status responses (see Automixer Gate Monitoring on page 42).

Mix-point OIDs

NOTE: In these tables, inputs are listed vertically along the left side of the table and outputs are listed horizontally across the top of the table.

Mic/Line Input to Analog and Aux Output Mix Matrix

	Out 1	Out 2	Out 3	Out 4	Out 5	Out 6	Out 7	Out 8	Aux			Out 1	Aux Out 2	Aux Out 3	Aux Out 4
Mic 1	20000	20000	1	20002	20003	20004	20005	20006	20007	20008	20009	20010	20011
Mic 2	20100	20100	1	20102	20103	20104	20105	20106	20107	20108	20109	20110	20111
Mic 3	20200	20200	1	20202	20203	20204	20205	20206	20207	20208	20209	20210	20211
Mic 4	20300	20300	1	20302	20303	20304	20305	20306	20307	20308	20309	20310	20311
Mic 5	20400	20400	1	20402	20403	20404	20405	20406	20407	20408	20409	20410	20411
Mic 6	20500	20500	1	20502	20503	20504	20505	20506	20507	20508	20509	20510	20511
Mic 7	20600	20600	1	20602	20603	20604	20605	20606	20607	20608	20609	20610	20611
Mic 8	20700	20700	1	20702	20703	20704	20705	20705	20707	20708	20709	20710	20711
Mic 9	20800	20800	1	20802	20803	20804	20805	20806	20807	20808	20809	20810	20811
Mic 10	20900	20900	1	20902	20903	20904	20905	20906	20907	20908	20909	20910	20911
Mic 11	21000	21000	1	21002	21003	21004	21005	21006	21007	21008	21009	21010	21011
Mic 12	21100	21100	1	21102	21103	21104	21105	21106	21107	21108	21109	21110	21111

Mic/Line Input to EXP Output Mix Matrix

	EXP Out 1	EXP Out 2	EXP Out 3	EXP Out 4	EXP Out 5	EXP Out 6	EXP Out 7	EXP Out 8	EXP Out 9	EXP Out 10	EXP Out 11	EXP Out 12	EXP Out 13	EXP Out 14	EXP Out 15	EXP Out 16
Mic 1	20032	20033	20034	20035	20036	20037	20038	20039	20040	20041	20042	20043	20044	20045	20046	20047
Mic 2	20132	20133	20134	20135	20136	20137	20138	20139	20140	20141	20142	20143	20144	20145	20146	20147
Mic 3	20232	20233	20234	20235	20236	20237	20238	20239	20240	20241	20242	20243	20244	20245	20246	20247
Mic 4	20332	20333	20334	20335	20336	20337	20338	20339	20340	20341	20342	20343	20344	20345	20346	20347
Mic 5	20432	20433	20434	20435	20436	20437	20438	20439	20440	20441	20442	20443	20444	20445	20446	20447
Mic 6	20532	20533	20534	20535	20536	20537	20538	20539	20540	20541	20542	20543	20544	20545	20546	20547
Mic 7	20632	20633	20634	20635	20636	20637	20638	20639	20640	20641	20642	20643	20644	20645	20646	20647
Mic 8	20732	20733	20734	20735	20736	20737	20738	20739	20740	20741	20742	20743	20744	20745	20746	20747
Mic 9	20832	20833	20834	20835	20836	20837	20838	20839	20840	20841	20842	20843	20844	20845	20846	20847
Mic 10	20932	20933	20934	20935	20936	20937	20938	20939	20940	20941	20942	20943	20944	20945	20946	20947
Mic 11	21032	21033	21034	21035	21036	21037	21038	21039	21040	21041	21042	21043	21044	21045	21046	21047
Mic 12	21132	21133	21134	21135	21136	21137	21138	21139	21140	21141	21142	21143	21144	21145	21146	21147

Mic/Line Input to Virtual Send Mix Matrix

	A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Mic 1	20016	20017	20018	20019	20020	20021	20022	20023	20024	20025	20026	20027	20028	20029	20030	20031
Mic 2	20116	20117	20118	20119	20120	20121	20122	20123	20124	20125	20126	20127	20128	20129	20130	20131
Mic 3	20216	20217	20218	20219	20220	20221	20222	20223	20224	20225	20226	20227	20228	20229	20230	20231
Mic 4	20316	20317	20318	20319	20320	20321	20322	20323	20324	20325	20326	20327	20328	20329	20330	20331
Mic 5	20416	20417	20418	20419	20420	20421	20422	20423	20424	20425	20426	20427	20428	20429	20430	20431
Mic 6	20516	20517	20518	20519	20520	20521	20522	20523	20524	20525	20526	20527	20528	20529	20530	20531
Mic 7	20616	20617	20618	20619	20620	20621	20622	20623	20624	20625	20626	20627	20628	20629	20630	20631
Mic 8	20716	20717	20718	20719	20720	20721	20722	20723	20724	20725	20726	20727	20728	20729	20730	20731
Mic 9	20816	20817	20818	20819	20820	20821	20822	20823	20824	20825	20826	20827	20828	20829	20830	20831
Mic 10	20916	20917	20918	20919	20920	20921	20922	20923	20924	20925	20926	20927	20928	20929	20930	20931
Mic 11	21016	21017	21018	21019	21020	21021	21022	21023	21024	21025	21026	21027	21028	21029	21030	21031
Mic 12	21116	21117	21118	21119	21120	21121	21122	21123	21124	21125	21126	21127	21128	21129	21130	21131

Aux Input to Analog and Aux Output Mix Matrix

	Out 1	Out 2	Out 3	Out 4	Out 5	Out 6	Out 7	Out 8	Aux			Out 1	Aux Out 2	Aux Out 3	Aux Out 4
Aux 1 2	200	2120	21202	21203	21204	21205	21206	21207	21208	21209	21210	21211
Aux 2 2	300	2130	21302	21303	21304	21305	21306	21307	21308	21309	21310	21311
Aux 3 2	400	2140	21402	21403	21404	21405	21406	21407	21408	21409	21410	21411
Aux 4 2	500	2150	21502	21503	21504	21505	21506	21507	21508	21509	21510	21511
Aux 5 2	600	2160	21602	21603	21604	21605	21606	21607	21608	21609	21610	21611
Aux 6 2	700	2170	21702	21703	21704	21705	21706	21707	21708	21709	21710	21711
Aux 7 2	800	2180	21802	21803	21804	21805	21806	21807	21808	21809	21810	21811
Aux 8 2	900	2190	21902	21903	21904	21905	21906	21907	21908	21909	21910	21911

Aux Input to EXP Output Mix Matrix

	EXP Out 1	EXP Out 2	EXP Out 3	EXP Out 4	EXP Out 5	EXP Out 6	EXP Out 7	EXP Out 8	EXP Out 9	EXP Out 10	EXP Out 11	EXP Out 12	EXP Out 13	EXP Out 14	EXP Out 15	EXP Out 16
Aux 1	21232	21233	21234	21235	21236	21237	21238	21239	21240	21241	21242	21243	21244	21245	21246	21247
Aux 2	21332	21333	21334	21335	21336	21337	21338	21339	21340	21341	21342	21343	21344	21345	21346	21347
Aux 3	21432	21433	21434	21435	21436	21437	21438	21439	21440	21441	21442	21443	21444	21445	21446	21447
Aux 4	21532	21533	21534	21535	21536	21537	21538	21539	21540	21541	21542	21543	21544	21545	21546	21547
Aux 5	21632	21633	21634	21635	21636	21637	21638	21639	21640	21641	21642	21643	21644	21645	21646	21647
Aux 6	21732	21733	21734	21735	21736	21737	21738	21739	21740	21741	21742	21743	21744	21745	21746	21747
Aux 7	21832	21833	21834	21835	21836	21837	21838	21839	21840	21841	21842	21843	21844	21845	21846	21847
Aux 8	21932	21933	21934	21935	21936	21937	21938	21939	21940	21941	21942	21943	21944	21945	21946	21947

Aux Input to Virtual Send Mix Matrix

	A B C D	E F G H	I J K L M	N O P
Aux 1	21216	21217	21218	21219	21220	21221	21222	21223	21224	21225	21226	21227	21228	21229	21230	21231
Aux 2	21316	21317	21318	21319	21320	21321	21322	21323	21324	21325	21326	21327	21328	21329	21330	21331
Aux 3	21416	21417	21418	21419	21420	21421	21422	21423	21424	21425	21426	21427	21428	21429	21430	21431
Aux 4	21516	21517	21518	21519	21520	21521	21522	21523	21524	21525	21526	21527	21528	21529	21530	21531
Aux 5	21616	21617	21618	21619	21620	21621	21622	21623	21624	21625	21626	21627	21628	21629	21630	21631
Aux 6	21716	21717	21718	21719	21720	21721	21722	21723	21724	21725	21726	21727	21728	21729	21730	21731
Aux 7	21816	21817	21818	21819	21820	21821	21822	21823	21824	21825	21826	21827	21828	21829	21830	21831
Aux 8	21916	21917	21918	21919	21920	21921	21922	21923	21924	21925	21926	21927	21928	21929	21930	21931

Virtual Return to Analog and Aux Output Mix Matrix

	Out 1	Out 2	Out 3	Out 4	Out 5	Out 6	Out 7	Out 8	Aux			Out 1	Aux Out 2	Aux Out 3	Aux Out 4
Rtn A	22000	22001	22002	22003	22004	22005	22006	22007	22008	22009	22010	22011
Rtn B	22100	22101	22102	22103	22104	22105	22106	22107	22108	22109	22110	22111
Rtn C	22200	22201	22202	22203	22204	22205	22206	22207	22208	22209	22210	22211
Rtn D	22300	22301	22302	22303	22304	22305	22306	22307	22308	22309	22310	22311
Rtn E	22400	22401	22402	22403	22404	22405	22406	22407	22408	22409	22410	22411
Rtn F	22500	22501	22502	22503	22504	22505	22506	22507	22508	22509	22510	22511
Rtn G	22600	22601	22602	22603	22604	22605	22606	22607	22608	22609	22610	22611
Rtn H	22700	22701	22702	22703	22704	22705	22706	22707	22708	22709	22710	22711
Rtn I	22800	22801	22802	22803	22804	22805	22806	22807	22808	22809	22810	22811
Rtn J	22900	22901	22902	22903	22904	22905	22906	22907	22908	22909	22910	22911
Rtn K	23000	23001	23002	23003	23004	23005	23006	23007	23008	23009	23010	23011
Rtn L	23100	23101	23102	23103	23104	23105	23106	23107	23108	23109	23110	23111
Rtn M	23200	23201	23202	23203	23204	23205	23206	23207	23208	23209	23210	23211
Rtn N	23300	23301	23302	23303	23304	23305	23306	23307	23308	23309	23310	23311
Rtn O	23400	23401	23402	23403	23404	23405	23406	23407	23408	23409	23410	23411
Rtn P	23500	23501	23502	23503	23504	23505	23506	23507	23508	23509	23510	23511

Virtual Return to EXP Output Mix Matrix

	EXP Out 1	EXP Out 2	EXP Out 3	EXP Out 4	EXP Out 5	EXP Out 6	EXP Out 7	EXP Out 8	EXP Out 9	EXP Out 10	EXP Out 11	EXP Out 12	EXP Out 13	EXP Out 14	EXP Out 15	EXP Out 16
Rtn A	22032	22033	22034	22035	22036	22037	22038	22039	22040	22041	22042	22043	22044	22045	22046	22047
Rtn B	22132	22133	22134	22135	22136	22137	22138	22139	22140	22141	22142	22143	22144	22145	22146	22147
Rtn C	22232	22233	22234	22235	22236	22237	22238	22239	22240	22241	22242	22243	22244	22245	22246	22247
Rtn D	22332	22333	22334	22335	22336	22337	22338	22339	22340	22341	22342	22343	22344	22345	22346	22347
Rtn E	22432	22433	22434	22435	22436	22437	22438	22439	22440	22441	22442	22443	22444	22445	22446	22447
Rtn F	22532	22533	22534	22535	22536	22537	22538	22539	22540	22541	22542	22543	22544	22545	22546	22547
Rtn G	22632	22633	22634	22635	22636	22637	22638	22639	22640	22641	22642	22643	22644	22645	22646	22647
Rtn H	22732	22733	22734	22735	22736	22737	22738	22739	22740	22741	22742	22743	22744	22745	22746	22747
Rtn I	22832	22833	22834	22835	22836	22837	22838	22839	22840	22841	22842	22843	22844	22845	22846	22847
Rtn J	22932	22933	22934	22935	22936	22937	22938	22939	22940	22941	22942	22943	22944	22945	22946	22947
Rtn K	23032	23033	23034	23035	23036	23037	23038	23039	23040	23041	23042	23043	23044	23045	23046	23047
Rtn L	23132	23133	23134	23135	23136	23137	23138	23139	23140	23141	23142	23143	23144	23145	23146	23147
Rtn M	23232	23233	23234	23235	23236	23237	23238	23239	23240	23241	23242	23243	23244	23245	23246	23247
Rtn N	23332	23333	23334	23335	23336	23337	23338	23339	23340	23341	23342	23343	23344	23345	23346	23347
Rtn O	23432	23433	23434	23435	23436	23437	23438	23439	23440	23441	23442	23443	23444	23445	23446	23447
Rtn P	23532	23533	23534	23535	23536	23537	23538	23539	23540	23541	23542	23543	23544	23545	23546	23547

Virtual Return to Virtual Send Mix Matrix

	A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Rtn A		22017	22018	22019	22020	22021	22022	22023	22024	22025	22026	22027	22028	22029	22030	22031
Rtn B	22116		22118	22119	22120	22121	22122	22123	22124	22125	22126	22127	22128	22129	22130	22131
Rtn C	22216	22217		22219	22220	22221	22222	22223	22224	22225	22226	22227	22228	22229	22230	22231
Rtn D	22316	22317	22318		22320	22321	22322	22323	22324	22325	22326	22327	22328	22329	22330	22331
Rtn E	22416	22417	22418	22419		22421	22422	22423	22424	22425	22426	22427	22428	22429	22430	22431
Rtn F	22516	22517	22518	22519	22520		22522	22523	22524	22525	22526	22527	22528	22529	22530	22531
Rtn G	22616	22617	22618	22619	22620	22621		22623	22624	22625	22626	22627	22628	22629	22630	22631
Rtn H	22716	22717	22718	22719	22720	22721	22722		22724	22725	22726	22727	22728	22729	22730	22731
Rtn I	22816	22817	22818	22819	22820	22821	22822	22823		22825	22826	22827	22828	22829	22830	22831
Rtn J	22916	22917	22918	22919	22920	22921	22922	22923	22924		22926	22927	22928	22929	22930	22931
Rtn K	23016	23017	23018	23019	23020	23021	23022	23023	23024	23025		23027	23028	23029	23030	23031
Rtn L	23116	23117	23118	23119	23120	23121	23122	23123	23124	23125	23126		23128	23129	23130	23131
Rtn M	23216	23217	23218	23219	23220	23221	23222	23223	23224	23225	23226	23227		23229	23230	23231
Rtn N	23316	23317	23318	23319	23320	23321	23322	23323	23324	23325	23326	23327	23328		23330	23331
Rtn O	23416	23417	23418	23419	23420	23421	23422	23423	23424	23425	23426	23427	23428	23429		23431
Rtn P	23516	23517	23518	23519	23520	23521	23522	23523	23524	23525	23526	23527	23528	23529	23530

EXP Input to Analog and Aux Output Mix Matrix

	Out 1	Out 2	Out 3	Out 4	Out 5	Out 6	Out 7	Out 8	Aux			Out 1	Aux Out 2	Aux Out 3	Aux Out 4
EXP 1	23600	23601	23602	23603	23604	23605	23606	23607	23608	23609	23610	23611
EXP 2	23700	23701	23702	23703	23704	23705	23706	23707	23708	23709	23710	23711
EXP 3	23800	23801	23802	23803	23804	23805	23806	23807	23808	23809	23810	23811
EXP 4	23900	23901	23902	23903	23904	23905	23906	23907	23908	23909	23910	23911
EXP 5	24000	24001	24002	24003	24004	24005	24006	24007	24008	24009	24010	24011
EXP 6	24100	24101	24102	24103	24104	24105	24106	24107	24108	24109	24110	24111
EXP 7	24200	24201	24202	24203	24204	24205	24206	24207	24208	24209	24210	24211
EXP 8	24300	24301	24302	24303	24304	24305	24306	24307	24308	24309	24310	24311
EXP 9	24400	24401	24402	24403	24404	24405	24406	24407	24408	24409	24410	24411
EXP 10	24500	24501	24502	24503	24504	24505	24506	24507	24508	24509	24510	24511
EXP 11	24600	24601	24602	24603	24604	24605	24606	24607	24608	24609	24610	24611
EXP 12	24700	24701	24702	24703	24704	24705	24706	24707	24708	24709	24710	24711
EXP 13	24800	24801	24802	24803	24804	24805	24806	24807	24808	24809	24810	24811
EXP 14	24900	24901	24902	24903	24904	24905	24906	24907	24908	24909	24910	24911
EXP 15	25000	25001	25002	25003	25004	25005	25006	25007	25008	25009	25010	25011
EXP 16	25100	25101	25102	25103	25104	25105	25106	25107	25108	25109	25110	25111
EXP 17	25200	252	01 25202	25203	25204	25205	25206	25207	25208	25209	25210	25211
EXP 18	25300	253	01 25302	25303	25304	25305	25306	25307	25308	25309	25310	25311
EXP 19	25400	254	01 25402	25403	25404	25405	25406	25407	25408	25409	25410	25411
EXP 20	25500	255	01 25502	25503	25504	25505	25506	25507	25508	25509	25510	25511
EXP 21	25600	256	01 25602	25603	25604	25605	25606	25607	25608	25609	25610	25611
EXP 22	25700	257	01 25702	25703	25704	25705	25706	25707	25708	25709	25710	25711
EXP 23	25800	258	01 25802	25803	25804	25805	25806	25807	25808	25809	25810	25811
EXP 24	25900	259	01 25902	25903	25904	25905	25906	25907	25908	25909	25910	25911
EXP 25	26000	260	01 26002	26003	26004	26005	26006	26007	26008	26009	26010	26011
EXP 26	26100	261	01 26102	26103	26104	26105	26106	26107	26108	26109	26110	26111
EXP 27	26200	262	01 26202	26203	26204	26205	26206	26207	26208	26209	26210	26211
EXP 28	26300	263	01 26302	26303	26304	26305	26306	26307	26308	26309	26310	26311
EXP 29	26400	264	01 26402	26403	26404	26405	26406	26407	26408	26409	26410	26411
EXP 30	26500	265	01 26502	26503	26504	26505	26506	26507	26508	26509	26510	26511
EXP 31	26600	266	01 26602	26603	26604	26605	26606	26607	26608	26609	26610	26611
EXP 32	26700	267	01 26702	26703	26704	26705	26706	26707	26708	26709	26710	26711
	Out 1	Out 2	Out 3	Out 4	Out 5	Out 6	Out 7	Out 8	Aux			Out 1	Aux Out 2	Aux Out 3	Aux Out 4
EXP 33	26800	268	01 26802	26803	26804	26805	26806	26807	26808	26809	26810	26811
EXP 34	26900	269	01 26902	26903	26904	26905	26906	26907	26908	26909	26910	26911
EXP 35	27000	270	01 27002	27003	27004	27005	27006	27007	27008	27009	27010	27011
EXP 36	27100	271	01 27102	27103	27104	27105	27106	27107	27108	27109	27110	27111
EXP 37	27200	272	01 27202	27203	27204	27205	27206	27207	27208	27209	27210	27211
EXP 38	27300	273	01 27302	27303	27304	27305	27306	27307	27308	27309	27310	27311
EXP 39	27400	274	01 27402	27403	27404	27405	27406	27407	27408	27409	27410	27411
EXP 40	27500	275	01 27502	27503	27504	27505	27506	27507	27508	27509	27510	27511
EXP 41	27600	276	01 27602	27603	27604	27605	27606	27607	27608	27609	27610	27611
EXP 42	27700	277	01 27702	27703	27704	27705	27706	27707	27708	27709	27710	27711
EXP 43	27800	278	01 27802	27803	27804	27805	27806	27807	27808	27809	27810	27811
EXP 44	27900	279	01 27902	27903	27904	27905	27906	27907	27908	27909	27910	27911
EXP 45	28000	280	01 28002	28003	28004	28005	28006	28007	28008	28009	28010	28011
EXP 46	28100	281	01 28102	28103	28104	28105	28106	28107	28108	28109	28110	28111
EXP 47	28200	282	01 28202	28203	28204	28205	28206	28207	28208	28209	28210	28211
EXP 48	28300	283	01 28302	28303	28304	28305	28306	28307	28308	28309	28310	28311
EXP 49	28400	28401	28402	28403	28404	28405	28406	28407	28408	28409	28410	28411
EXP 50	28500	28501	28502	28503	28504	28505	28506	28507	28508	28509	28510	28511
EXP 51	28600	28601	28602	28603	28604	28605	28606	28607	28608	28609	28610	28611
EXP 52	28700	28701	28702	28703	28704	28705	28706	28707	28708	28709	28710	28711
EXP 53	28800	28801	28802	28803	28804	28805	28806	28807	28808	28809	28810	28811
EXP 54	28900	28901	28902	28903	28904	28905	28906	28907	28908	28909	28910	28911
EXP 55	29000	29001	29002	29003	29004	29005	29006	29007	29008	29009	29010	29011
EXP 56	29100	29101	29102	29103	29104	29105	29106	29107	29108	29109	29110	29111
EXP 57	29200	29201	29202	29203	29204	29205	29206	29207	29208	29209	29210	29211
EXP 58	29300	29301	29302	29303	29304	29305	29306	29307	29308	29309	29310	29311
EXP 59	29400	29401	29402	29403	29404	29405	29406	29407	29408	29409	29410	29411
EXP 60	29500	29501	29502	29503	29504	29505	29506	29507	29508	29509	29510	29511
EXP 61	29600	29601	29602	29603	29604	29605	29606	29607	29608	29609	29610	29611
EXP 62	29700	29701	29702	29703	29704	29705	29706	29707	29708	29709	29710	29711
EXP 63	29800	29801	29802	29803	29804	29805	29806	29807	29808	29809	29810	29811
EXP 64	29900	29901	29902	29903	29904	29905	29906	29907	29908	29909	29910	29911

EXP Input to EXP Output Mix Matrix

	EXP Out 1	EXP Out 2	EXP Out 3	EXP Out 4	EXP Out 5	EXP Out 6	EXP Out 7	EXP Out 8	EXP Out 9	EXP Out 10	EXP Out 11	EXP Out 12	EXP Out 13	EXP Out 14	EXP Out 15	EXP Out 16
EXP 1	23632	23633	23634	23635	23636	23637	23638	23639	23640	23641	23642	23643	23644	23645	23646	23647
EXP 2	23732	23733	23734	23735	23736	23737	23738	23739	23740	23741	23742	23743	23744	23745	23746	23747
EXP 3	23832	23833	23834	23835	23836	23837	23838	23839	23840	23841	23842	23843	23844	23845	23846	23847
EXP 4	23932	23933	23934	23935	23936	23937	23938	23939	23940	23941	23942	23943	23944	23945	23946	23947
EXP 5	24032	24033	24034	24035	24036	24037	24038	24039	24040	24041	24042	24043	24044	24045	24046	24047
EXP 6	24132	24133	24134	24135	24136	24137	24138	24139	24140	24141	24142	24143	24144	24145	24146	24147
EXP 7	24232	24233	24234	24235	24236	24237	24238	24239	24240	24241	24242	24243	24244	24245	24246	24247
EXP 8	24332	24333	24334	24335	24336	24337	24338	24339	24340	24341	24342	24343	24344	24345	24346	24347
EXP 9	24432	24433	24434	24435	24436	24437	24438	24439	24440	24441	24442	24443	24444	24445	24446	24447
EXP 10	24532	24533	24534	24535	24536	24537	24538	24539	24540	24541	24542	24543	24544	24545	24546	24547
EXP 11	24632	24633	24634	24635	24636	24637	24638	24639	24640	24641	24642	24643	24644	24645	24646	24647
EXP 12	24732	24733	24734	24735	24736	24737	24738	24739	24740	24741	24742	24743	24744	24745	24746	24747
EXP 13	24832	24833	24834	24835	24836	24837	24838	24839	24840	24841	24842	24843	24844	24845	24846	24847
EXP 14	24932	24933	24934	24935	24936	24937	24938	24939	24940	24941	24942	24943	24944	24945	24946	24947
EXP 15	25032	25033	25034	25035	25036	25037	25038	25039	25040	25041	25042	25043	25044	25045	25046	25047
EXP 16	25132	25133	25134	25135	25136	25137	25138	25139	25140	25141	25142	25143	25144	25145	25146	25147
EXP 17	25232	25233	25234	25235	25236	25237	25238	25239	25240	25241	25242	25243	25244	25245	25246	25247
EXP 18	25332	25333	25334	25335	25336	25337	25338	25339	25340	25341	25342	25343	25344	25345	25346	25347
EXP 19	25432	25433	25434	25435	25436	25437	25438	25439	25440	25441	25442	25443	25444	25445	25446	25447
EXP 20	25532	25533	25534	25535	25536	25537	25538	25539	25540	25541	25542	25543	25544	25545	25546	25547
EXP 21	25632	25633	25634	25635	25636	25637	25638	25639	25640	25641	25642	25643	25644	25645	25646	25647
EXP 22	25732	25733	25734	25735	25736	25737	25738	25739	25740	25741	25742	25743	25744	25745	25746	25747
EXP 23	25832	25833	25834	25835	25836	25837	25838	25839	25840	25841	25842	25843	25844	25845	25846	25847
EXP 24	25932	25933	25934	25935	25936	25937	25938	25939	25940	25941	25942	25943	25944	25945	25946	25947
EXP 25	26032	26033	26034	26035	26036	26037	26038	26039	26040	26041	26042	26043	26044	26045	26046	26047
EXP 26	26132	26133	26134	26135	26136	26137	26138	26139	26140	26141	26142	26143	26144	26145	26146	26147
EXP 27	26232	26233	26234	26235	26236	26237	26238	26239	26240	26241	26242	26243	26244	26245	26246	26247
EXP 28	26332	26333	26334	26335	26336	26337	26338	26339	26340	26341	26342	26343	26344	26345	26346	26347
EXP 29	26432	26433	26434	26435	26436	26437	26438	26439	26440	26441	26442	26443	26444	26445	26446	26447
EXP 30	26532	26533	26534	26535	26536	26537	26538	26539	26540	26541	26542	26543	26544	26545	26546	26547
EXP 31	26632	26633	26634	26635	26636	26637	26638	26639	26640	26641	26642	26643	26644	26645	26646	26647
EXP 32	26732	26733	26734	26735	26736	26737	26738	26739	26740	26741	26742	26743	26744	26745	26746	26747
	EXP Out 1	EXP Out 2	EXP Out 3	EXP Out 4	EXP Out 5	EXP Out 6	EXP Out 7	EXP Out 8	EXP Out 9	EXP Out 10	EXP Out 11	EXP Out 12	EXP Out 13	EXP Out 14	EXP Out 15	EXP Out 16
EXP 33	26832	26833	26834	26835	26836	26837	26838	26839	26840	26841	26842	26843	26844	26845	26846	26847
EXP 34	26932	26933	26934	26935	26936	26937	26938	26939	26940	26941	26942	26943	26944	26945	26946	26947
EXP 35	27032	27033	27034	27035	27036	27037	27038	27039	27040	27041	27042	27043	27044	27045	27046	27047
EXP 36	27132	27133	27134	27135	27136	27137	27138	27139	27140	27141	27142	27143	27144	27145	27146	27147
EXP 37	27232	27233	27234	27235	27236	27237	27238	27239	27240	27241	27242	27243	27244	27245	27246	27247
EXP 38	27332	27333	27334	27335	27336	27337	27338	27339	27340	27341	27342	27343	27344	27345	27346	27347
EXP 39	27432	27433	27434	27435	27436	27437	27438	27439	27440	27441	27442	27443	27444	27445	27446	27447
EXP 40	27532	27533	27534	27535	27536	27537	27538	27539	27540	27541	27542	27543	27544	27545	27546	27547
EXP 41	27632	27633	27634	27635	27636	27637	27638	27639	27640	27641	27642	27643	27644	27645	27646	27647
EXP 42	27732	27733	27734	27735	27736	27737	27738	27739	27740	27741	27742	27743	27744	27745	27746	27747
EXP 43	27832	27833	27834	27835	27836	27837	27838	27839	27840	27841	27842	27843	27844	27845	27846	27847
EXP 44	27932	27933	27934	27935	27936	27937	27938	27939	27940	27941	27942	27943	27944	27945	27946	27947
EXP 45	28032	28033	28034	28035	28036	28037	28038	28039	28040	28041	28042	28043	28044	28045	28046	28047
EXP 46	28132	28133	28134	28135	28136	28137	28138	28139	28140	28141	28142	28143	28144	28145	28146	28147
EXP 47	28232	28233	28234	28235	28236	28237	28238	28239	28240	28241	28242	28243	28244	28245	28246	28247
EXP 48	28332	28333	28334	28335	28336	28337	28338	28339	28340	28341	28342	28343	28344	28345	28346	28347
EXP 49	28432	28433	28434	28435	28436	28437	28438	28439	28440	28441	28442	28443	28444	28445	28446	28447
EXP 50	28532	28533	28534	28535	28536	28537	28538	28539	28540	28541	28542	28543	28544	28545	28546	28547
EXP 51	28632	28633	28634	28635	28636	28637	28638	28639	28640	28641	28642	28643	28644	28645	28646	28647
EXP 52	28732	28733	28734	28735	28736	28737	28738	28739	28740	28741	28742	28743	28744	28745	28746	28747
EXP 53	28832	28833	28834	28835	28836	28837	28838	28839	28840	28841	28842	28843	28844	28845	28846	28847
EXP 54	28932	28933	28934	28935	28936	28937	28938	28939	28940	28941	28942	28943	28944	28945	28946	28947
EXP 55	29032	29033	29034	29035	29036	29037	29038	29039	29040	29041	29042	29043	29044	29045	29046	29047
EXP 56	29132	29133	29134	29135	29136	29137	29138	29139	29140	29141	29142	29143	29144	29145	29146	29147
EXP 57	29232	29233	29234	29235	29236	29237	29238	29239	29240	29241	29242	29243	29244	29245	29246	29247
EXP 58	29332	29333	29334	29335	29336	29337	29338	29339	29340	29341	29342	29343	29344	29345	29346	29347
EXP 59	29432	29433	29434	29435	29436	29437	29438	29439	29440	29441	29442	29443	29444	29445	29446	29447
EXP 60	29532	29533	29534	29535	29536	29537	29538	29539	29540	29541	29542	29543	29544	29545	29546	29547
EXP 61	29632	29633	29634	29635	29636	29637	29638	29639	29640	29641	29642	29643	29644	29645	29646	29647
EXP 62	29732	29733	29734	29735	29736	29737	29738	29739	29740	29741	29742	29743	29744	29745	29746	29747
EXP 63	29832	29833	29834	29835	29836	29837	29838	29839	29840	29841	29842	29843	29844	29845	29846	29847
EXP 64	29932	29933	29934	29935	29936	29937	29938	29939	29940	29941	29942	29943	29944	29945	29946	29947

EXP Input to Virtual Send Mix Matrix

	A B C D	E F G H I	J K L M	N O P
EXP 1	23616	23617	23618	23619	23620	23621	23622	23623	23624	23625	23626	23627	23628	23629	23630	23631
EXP 2	23716	23717	23718	23719	23720	23721	23722	23723	23724	23725	23726	23727	23728	23729	23730	23731
EXP 3	23816	23817	23818	23819	23820	23821	23822	23823	23824	23825	23826	23827	23828	23829	23830	23831
EXP 4	23916	23917	23918	23919	23920	23921	23922	23923	23924	23925	23926	23927	23928	23929	23930	23931
EXP 5	24016	24017	24018	24019	24020	24021	24022	24023	24024	24025	24026	24027	24028	24029	24030	24031
EXP 6	24116	24117	24118	24119	24120	24121	24122	24123	24124	24125	24126	24127	24128	24129	24130	24131
EXP 7	24216	24217	24218	24219	24220	24221	24222	24223	24224	24225	24226	24227	24228	24229	24230	24231
EXP 8	24316	24317	24318	24319	24320	24321	24322	24323	24324	24325	24326	24327	24328	24329	24330	24331
EXP 9	24416	24417	24418	24419	24420	24421	24422	24423	24424	24425	24426	24427	24428	24429	24430	24431
EXP 10	24516	24517	24518	24519	24520	24521	24522	24523	24524	24525	24526	24527	24528	24529	24530	24531
EXP 11	24616	24617	24618	24619	24620	24621	24622	24623	24624	24625	24626	24627	24628	24629	24630	24631
EXP 12	24716	24717	24718	24719	24720	24721	24722	24723	24724	24725	24726	24727	24728	24729	24730	24731
EXP 13	24816	24817	24818	24819	24820	24821	24822	24823	24824	24825	24826	24827	24828	24829	24830	24831
EXP 14	24916	24917	24918	24919	24920	24921	24922	24923	24924	24925	24926	24927	24928	24929	24930	24931
EXP 15	25016	25017	25018	25019	25020	25021	25022	25023	25024	25025	25026	25027	25028	25029	25030	25031
EXP 16	25116A B C D	25117E F G H	25118J K L M	25119N O P	25120	25121	25122	25123	25124	25125	25126	25127	25128	25129	25130	25131
EXP 17	25216	25217	25218	25219	25220	25221	25222	25223	25224	25225	25226	25227	25228	25229	25230	25231
EXP 18	25316	25317	25318	25319	25320	25321	25322	25323	25324	25325	25326	25327	25328	25329	25330	25331
EXP 19	25416	25417	25418	25419	25420	25421	25422	25423	25424	25425	25426	25427	25428	25429	25430	25431
EXP 20	25516	25517	25518	25519	25520	25521	25522	25523	25524	25525	25526	25527	25528	25529	25530	25531
EXP 21	25616	25617	25618	25619	25620	25621	25622	25623	25624	25625	25626	25627	25628	25629	25630	25631
EXP 22	25716	25717	25718	25719	25720	25721	25722	25723	25724	25725	25726	25727	25728	25729	25730	25731
EXP 23	25816	25817	25818	25819	25820	25821	25822	25823	25824	25825	25826	25827	25828	25829	25830	25831
EXP 24	25916	25917	25918	25919	25920	25921	25922	25923	25924	25925	25926	25927	25928	25929	25930	25931
EXP 25	26016	26017	26018	26019	26020	26021	26022	26023	26024	26025	26026	26027	26028	26029	26030	26031
EXP 26	26116	26117	26118	26119	26120	26121	26122	26123	26124	26125	26126	26127	26128	26129	26130	26131
EXP 27	26216	26217	26218	26219	26220	26221	26222	26223	26224	26225	26226	26227	26228	26229	26230	26231
EXP 28	26316	26317	26318	26319	26320	26321	26322	26323	26324	26325	26326	26327	26328	26329	26330	26331
EXP 29	26416	26417	26418	26419	26420	26421	26422	26423	26424	26425	26426	26427	26428	26429	26430	26431
EXP 30	26516	26517	26518	26519	26520	26521	26522	26523	26524	26525	26526	26527	26528	26529	26530	26531
EXP 31	26616	26617	26618	26619	26620	26621	26622	26623	26624	26625	26626	26627	26628	26629	26630	26631
EXP 32	26716	26717	26718	26719	26720	26721	26722	26723	26724	26725	26726	26727	26728	26729	26730	26731
	A B C D	E F G H	J K L M	N O P
EXP 33	26816	26817	26818	26819	26820	26821	26822	26823	26824	26825	26826	26827	26828	26829	26830	26831
EXP 34	26916	26917	26918	26919	26920	26921	26922	26923	26924	26925	26926	26927	26928	26929	26930	26931
EXP 35	27016	27017	27018	27019	27020	27021	27022	27023	27024	27025	27026	27027	27028	27029	27030	27031
EXP 36	27116	27117	27118	27119	27120	27121	27122	27123	27124	27125	27126	27127	27128	27129	27130	27131
EXP 37	27216	27217	27218	27219	27220	27221	27222	27223	27224	27225	27226	27227	27228	27229	27230	27231
EXP 38	27316	27317	27318	27319	27320	27321	27322	27323	27324	27325	27326	27327	27328	27329	27330	27331
EXP 39	27416	27417	27418	27419	27420	27421	27422	27423	27424	27425	27426	27427	27428	27429	27430	27431
EXP 40	27516	27517	27518	27519	27520	27521	27522	27523	27524	27525	27526	27527	27528	27529	27530	27531
EXP 41	27616	27617	27618	27619	27620	27621	27622	27623	27624	27625	27626	27627	27628	27629	27630	27631
EXP 42	27716	27717	27718	27719	27720	27721	27722	27723	27724	27725	27726	27727	27728	27729	27730	27731
EXP 43	27816	27817	27818	27819	27820	27821	27822	27823	27824	27825	27826	27827	27828	27829	27830	27831
EXP 44	27916	27917	27918	27919	27920	27921	27922	27923	27924	27925	27926	27927	27928	27929	27930	27931
EXP 45	28016	28017	28018	28019	28020	28021	28022	28023	28024	28025	28026	28027	28028	28029	28030	28031
EXP 46	28116	28117	28118	28119	28120	28121	28122	28123	28124	28125	28126	28127	28128	28129	28130	28131
EXP 47	28216	28217	28218	28219	28220	28221	28222	28223	28224	28225	28226	28227	28228	28229	28230	28231
EXP 48	28316	28317	28318	28319	28320	28321	28322	28323	28324	28325	28326	28327	28328	28329	28330	28331
EXP 49	28416	28417	28418	28419	28420	28421	28422	28423	28424	28425	28426	28427	28428	28429	28430	28431
EXP 50	28516	28517	28518	28519	28520	28521	28522	28523	28524	28525	28526	28527	28528	28529	28530	28531
EXP 51	28616	28617	28618	28619	28620	28621	28622	28623	28624	28625	28626	28627	28628	28629	28630	28631
EXP 52	28716	28717	28718	28719	28720	28721	28722	28723	28724	28725	28726	28727	28728	28729	28730	28731
EXP 53	28816	28817	28818	28819	28820	28821	28822	28823	28824	28825	28826	28827	28828	28829	28830	28831
EXP 54	28916	28917	28918	28919	28920	28921	28922	28923	28924	28925	28926	28927	28928	28929	28930	28931
EXP 55	29016	29017	29018	29019	29020	29021	29022	29023	29024	29025	29026	29027	29028	29029	29030	29031
EXP 56	29116	29117	29118	29119	29120	29121	29122	29123	29124	29125	29126	29127	29128	29129	29130	29131
EXP 57	29216	29217	29218	29219	29220	29221	29222	29223	29224	29225	29226	29227	29228	29229	29230	29231
EXP 58	29316	29317	29318	29319	29320	29321	29322	29323	29324	29325	29326	29327	29328	29329	29330	29331
EXP 59	29416	29417	29418	29419	29420	29421	29422	29423	29424	29425	29426	29427	29428	29429	29430	29431
EXP 60	29516	29517	29518	29519	29520	29521	29522	29523	29524	29525	29526	29527	29528	29529	29530	29531
EXP 61	29616	29617	29618	29619	29620	29621	29622	29623	29624	29625	29626	29627	29628	29629	29630	29631
EXP 62	29716	29717	29718	29719	29720	29721	29722	29723	29724	29725	29726	29727	29728	29729	29730	29731
EXP 63	29816	29817	29818	29819	29820	29821	29822	29823	29824	29825	29826	29827	29828	29829	29830	29831
EXP 64	29916	29917	29918	29919	29920	29921	29922	29923	29924	29925	29926	29927	29928	29929	29930	29931

Web Pages

This section describes web page operation and control of the DMP 128 Plus and covers the following topics:

• DMP 128 Plus Web Page
• DMP 128 Plus VoIP Web Page
• Special Characters

The DMP 128 Plus can be accessed by a PC or control system using a rear panel Ethernet LAN port (non-V models) or LAN/VoIP port (V models only) and a web browser such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer. There are potentially two web pages installed on the DMP 128 Plus, one for general configuration and one for VoIP configuration (V models only). These web pages are factory-installed HTML pages and cannot be erased or overwritten.

NOTE: If the Ethernet connection to the device is unstable, try turning off the proxy server in the web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, click Tools > Internet Options > Connections > LAN Settings, uncheck the Use a proxy server... , then click OK.

DMP 128 Plus Web Page

Accessing the Embedded Web Page

1. From a web browser, enter the device IP address into the address field.

NOTE: If the local system administrators have not changed the IP address, and the device has not been assigned an IP address via DHCP, the default address is 192.168.254.254.

1. Press . The device checks the password protection status, if a password is required, enter the password in the Connect to... dialog box and press . No username is required.
2. The device checks several possibilities in the following order and responds accordingly:

a. If the address includes a specific file name, such as 192.168.254.254/file_name.html, the device downloads the web page.
b. If there is a file in the device memory named index.html, the device downloads index.html as the default startup page.
c. If a and b do not apply, the device downloads the factory-installed default startup page, nortxe_index.html, also known as the System Status page.

Using the Web Page

DMP 128 Plus C DMP 128 Plus C Firmware: v1.00.0001 Extron. Logged in as: action Logged Communication Settings TOP/IP Host Name: DMP-128-Plus C-06-05-4D DHCP: CF Shift IP Address: 340.138.254.254 Direct Mode: 255.255.256.9 Gazowia SP: 0.0/9 Mac Address: (N=0) 48-02-05-4D DOR RS-223 Settings Base S/O: 58400 Partly MR: None Data BR: 8 Drop BR: 1 Device Info Device Name: DMP-128-Plus C-06-05-4D File Start Number: RS-1513-01 Model Name: DMP-128 Plus C Model Description: DMP-128 Plus C Performance Version: (36.808.4617) Temperature: (11.27534)°C Update Date/Time Settings Date: Tuesday, September 11, 2016 Time: 06:08:49 PM Timeout: (UTC+00:00) Sync to PC Set Manuals/ Passwords Set Configure This Device To configure this device, download and install DSP Configurator. http://www.xpro.com/?helpbank/ © Extron Electronics 2016 DWP v0.0034

① Communications Settings Panel

⑤ Firmware Update Button

② RS-232 Settings Panel

⑥ Date/Time Settings Panel

③ Device Info Panel

⑦ Passwords Panel

4 Device Name Edit Button

Figure 198. DMP 128 Plus Web Page

Communications Settings Panel — Displays TCP/IP communication settings. Click Edit to open the Communication Settings dialog box and edit the TCP/IP settings.

Communication Settings Hostname: CMP-128-Plus-C-0E-D5-6D Use DHCP (Octan IP address automatically) IP Address: 192.168.254.254 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway: 6.0.0.0 MAC Address: 00-05-36-0E-D5-6D Apply Reset to Default Cancel

Figure 199. Communication Settings Dialog Box

From this dialog box DHCP status, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway can be edited. The device MAC address can also be viewed in this dialog box.

NOTE: If Use DHCP is enabled, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway can not be edited.

② RS-232 Settings Panel — Provides a read-only display of device RS-232 settings.
③ Device Info Panel — Displays general device information.

4 Device Name Edit Button — Click the Edit button to the right of the device name to open the Device Name dialog box. In this dialog box, the current name can be edited to a user-defined name or reset back to the default name.

Device Name Enter a device name: XMB 128 Plus C:05-05-V3 Apply Reset to Default Cancel

Figure 200. Device Name Dialog Box

5 Firmware Update Button — Click the Update button to open the Firmware Update dialog box.

Firmware Update Firmware: Browse Upload Cancel

Figure 201. Firmware Update Dialog Box

Click the Browse button to open the Choose a File to Upload dialog box where a firmware file can be selected to upload.

NOTES:

• Only files with a .S19 and .eff extensions are accepted.
• When firmware is version 1.01.0010 or higher, the firmware cannot be downgraded to a version lower than 1.01.0010.

Choose Files Help Computer > Local Disk C1 > Program Files (MB) > Extran > Software > BMP_2.5 > .0.0 Organize > File Follower Name Only modified Type Size C75-408.329 6.0/0.0/7.2/0.0/4 32.7/4x 1.7/2.0/0.0 DMP_2.5_0.0_FN_REVISION_HKEYNET_ 6.0/0.0/7.2/0.0/4 Active Modified 0... 347.4x File name: 175.168.329 Alt Fox 7.7 Open Cancel

Figure 202. File to Upload Dialog Box

For information regarding the download and installation of firmware files, see Downloading Firmware Updates on page 85.

6 Date/Time Settings Panel — Displays date, time, and time zone information for the device. Click Sync to PC to sync date and time information on the device with the date and time on the host computer. Alternatively, click Set Manually to open the Date and Time Settings dialog box which allows the user to set date, time, and time zone information.

Date and Time Settings Dates: Tuesday, July 26, 2016 July 2015 Time: 12 47 65 PM Time Zone: (UTC 08:00)(UTC 07:00) Pacific Time Apply Cancel

Figure 203. Date and Time Settings Dialog Box

7 Passwords Panel — Click the Set button in the Passwords panel to open the Passwords dialog box which allows users to set admin and user passwords. Enter and confirm a password, then click Apply to apply the password.

NOTE: An administrator password must be applied before a user password can be applied.

Passwords Login ID: admin Administrator Password: Confirm Password: Login ID: user User Password: Configure Password: Apply Cancel

Figure 204. Passwords Dialog Box

DMP 128 Plus VoIP Web Page

Accessing the Embedded VoIP Web Page

1. From a web browser, enter the device IP address into the address field followed by /www/voip.html.

NOTE: If the local system administrators have not changed the IP address, and the device has not been assigned an IP address via DHCP, the default address is 192.168.254.254.

1. Press .

2. If a username and password have been set to access the basic DMP 128 Plus web page, the same username and password are required to access the VoIP web page.

Using the VoIP Web Page

Home Page

The Home page displays high level information about the DMP 128 Plus VoIP configuration.

DMP 128 Plus C V AT Digital audio matrix processor with AEC, VoIP, and Dante Firmware: v1.01.0006 Home Network Line 3 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Links System VoIP Status Line Registered Audio DMP Cell Status Packets No Packets Drapped (View As Cost) Duration Line 1 Registered - Primary Configured 16251 0 3 00:02:50 Line 2 Registered - Primary Configured - - - - - Line 3 Registered - Primary Configured 1687 0 0 00:03:54 Line 4 Registered - Primary Configured - - - - - Line 5 Registered - Primary Not Configured - - - - - Line 6 Registered - Primary Not Configured - - - - - Line 7 Registered - Primary Not Configured - - - - - Line 8 Registered - Primary Not Configured - - - - - Details - Line 1 - 2 active calls Appearance Code Duration Packets No Packets Drapped After As (Yes) 1 g722 00:02:50 #481 0 3 2 g722 00:02:37 7810 0 2

① Navigation Tabs

③ Details Panel

② VoIP Status Panel

Figure 205. VoIP Home Page

① Navigation Tabs — Click these tabs to navigate to the respective pages for network configuration, line registration, system logs, and configuration file import or export.
② VoIP Status Panel — This panel displays the status of the following parameters for each VoIP line:

• Line — Displays the VoIP line number.
- Registration — Displays the current registration status of that line. Registered lines indicate whether the primary or secondary server is used.
- Audio DSP — Displays whether the line is assigned to an Aux channel in the DMP 128 Plus (Configured) or the line is not assigned to an Aux channel (Not Configured) (see Aux Inputs on page 43 for more information).
- Call Status — Displays a green "off hook" (active) or a red "on hook" (inactive) icon depending on the call status of that line.
- Packets Rx — Displays the total number of packets received on the line for the current call.
- Packets Dropped — Displays the total number of packets dropped on that line for the current call.
- Jitter Rx — Displays the current inbound network jitter value for that line in the current call (highest network jitter value if multiple appearances of jitter).
• Duration — Displays the duration of the current call in hh:mm:ss format.

③ Details Panel — Displays the details of each appearance within the line currently selected in the VoIP Status panel including the current codec in use, call duration, packets received, packets dropped, and inbound jitter.

Network Page

The Network page has drop-down ribbons and tabs that are used to configure VoIP network settings. There are four tabs available for VoIP configuration.

- Interface

• Transport on page 171

• QoS/LLDP-MED on the next page

• NAT Traversal on page 173

Interface

DMP 128 Plus C V AT Digital audio matrix processor with AEC, VoIP, and Dante Firmware: v1.01.0002 Home Network Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Logs System Interface QoS/LLDP-MEO Transport NAT Traversal VoIP Interface: LAN 1 DNS 1 (Optional): DNS 2 (Optional): LAN 1 IP Address: DHCP Static IP Address: 192.168.50.03 Submit Mask: 255.255.255.0 Export Mask: 6.0.0.0 LAN 2 IP Address: DHCP Static IP Address: 192.168.1.254 Submit Mask: 255.255.255.0 Gateway: 6.0.0.0 Clear VLAN Apply

① VoIP Interface

④ VLAN Configuration

② LAN 1 Configuration

⑤ Apply Button

③ LAN 2 Configuration

Figure 206. VoIP Network Interface Page

① VoIP Interface — Select the desired LAN/VoIP port to be used for VoIP network traffic. Options are LAN 1, LAN 2, and VLAN.

NOTE: Only select VLAN when joining a tagged network port on the switch. LAN 1 or LAN 2 must be selected within the VLAN ribbon. Enter an appropriate VLAN ID tag and select DHCP or Static IP configuration.

② LAN 1 Configuration — Select DHCP, or select Static and enter a valid IP configuration.

③ LAN 2 Configuration — Select DHCP, or select Static and enter a valid IP configuration.

4 VLAN Configuration — This ribbon is only available when VLAN is selected from the VoIP Interface drop-down. Use the fields to enter a VLAN IP configuration.

⑤ Apply Button — Click the Apply button to commit interface changes to the device.

QoS/LLDP-MED

DMP 128 Plus C V AT Digital audio matrix processor with AEC, VoIP, and Dante Firmware: v1.01.0003 Home Network Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Logs System Interface QoS/LLDP-MED Transport NAT Traversal QoS QoS Layer 2: 3 - Critical Applications QoS Layer 3 (SIP): 24 - Call Signaling QoS Layer 3 (RTP): 46 - Voice LLDP-MED LLDP-MED Enable Disable ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START ○ START

① QoS Configuration

③ Apply Button

② LLDP-MED Configuration

Figure 207. VoIP Network QoS/LLDP-MED Page

① QoS Configuration

1. Use the QoS Layer 2 drop-down to specify the PCP (Priority Code Point) decimal value for layer 2 network frames. The default selection is 3 - Critical Applications.
2. Use the QoS Layer 3 (SIP) drop-down to specify the DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) decimal value for layer 3 SIP network packets. The default selection is 24 - Call Signaling.
3. Use the QoS Layer 3 (RTP) drop-down to specify the DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) decimal value for layer 3 RTP network packets. The default selection is 46 - Voice.

NOTE: Consult the VoIP system administrator before changing any QoS values.

② LLDP-MED Configuration

1. Select Enable or Disable (default) for LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery).
2. Select the VLAN ID checkbox to read the voice VLAN ID from the network and automatically configure the DMP 128 Plus VLAN tag (VLAN must be selected as the interface for this feature to work).

3. Select the Qos PCP checkbox to read PCP values from the network and automatically configure layer 2 QoS.

4. Select the QoS DSCP checkbox to read DSCP values from the network and automatically configure layer 3 QoS.

NOTE: VLAN ID, QoS PCP, and QoS DSCP values read from the network and applied to the DMP 128 Plus overwrite any manually specified values.

1. Select the Inventory checkbox to send the DMP 128 Plus model number, part number, and firmware details to the network switch.
2. Select the Civic Location checkbox to send the location details entered into the Civic Location panel. This is useful when logging the physical location of the DMP 128 Plus for network management purposes.

③ Apply Button — Click the Apply button to commit Qos and LLDP-MED changes to the device.

Transport

DMP 128 Plus C V AT Digital audio matrix processor with AEC, VoIP, and Dante Firmware: v1.01.0003 Home Network Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Logs System Interface: QoS/11DP-MED Transport NAT Traverse Transport ① Transport: UDP TCP TLS Listening Port: 5061 ② Use Secure RTP (AES CTR) Apply ③ TLS Mouse ④ Land Mouse Generate Local Data Browse Import Export ⑤ Private Drive Browse Import Export ⑥ ⑦ Service Center Add Cuts Add CA Remove

① Transport Protocol Configuration
② Use Secure RTP (AES CTR) Checkbox
③ TLS Mode Drop-Down
④ Local Mode Drop-Down

⑤ Local Cert
⑥ Private Key
⑦ Server Certs
⑧ Apply Button

Figure 208. VoIP Network Transport Page

① Transport Protocol Configuration — Select UDP (default), TCP, or TLS transport protocols.

NOTE: When TLS is selected, the listening port changes from 5060 to 5061. The listening port can be manually adjusted.

② Use Secure RTP (AES CTR) Checkbox — Check this box to encrypt RTP audio streams using the AES CTR cipher.

③ TSL Mode Drop-Down — Choose Always Allow or Always Verify TLS modes.

NOTE: This option is only available when TLS is selected as the transport protocol.

4 Local Mode Drop-Down — Choose a default local certificate or upload a custom local certificate to the DMP 128 Plus. When the default certificate is selected, click Generate to force the DMP 128 Plus to self-generate a new local certificate and private key. Self-generated certificates can be exported by clicking the Export button.

NOTE: Certificates and private keys must be in the Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. The certificate filename cannot be longer than 32 characters, including the .pem extension.

5 Local Cert — If Local Mode is set to Upload, click the Browse button to locate a certificate on the host PC. Click Import to commit this certificate to the DMP 128 Plus. Click Export to save the current local certificate to the default download directory of the web browser on the host PC.
6 Private Key — If Local Mode is set to Upload, click the Browse button to locate a private key on the host PC. Click Import to commit this key to the DMP 128 Plus. Click Export to save the current private key to the default download directory of the web browser on the host PC.
7 Server Certs — Displays up to eight server certificates that can be stored on the DMP 128 Plus at any one time. The following buttons are also available.

• Add Cert — Click to add a server certificate to the system.
• Add CA — Click to add a Certificate Authority certificate to the system.
• Remove — Highlight a listed certificate and click this button to remove it from the system.

8 Apply Button — Commits changes made to the transport protocol configuration to the DMP 128 Plus.

NAT Traversal

DMP 128 Plus C V AT Digital audio matrix processor with AEC, VoIP, and Dante Firmware: v1.01.0003 Home Network Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Logs System Interface QoS/LLDP-MED Transport NAT Traversal NAT Traversal ① NAT Traversal: Disabled ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ Apply

① NAT Traversal Configuration
② STUN Server Address
③ STUN Port
④ TURN Server Address

⑤ TURN Port
⑥ TURN Username
⑦ TURN Password
⑧ Apply Button

Figure 209. VoIP Network NAT Traversal Page

① NAT Traversal Configuration — From the drop-down, select Disabled (default), STUN Server, TURN Server, or STUN/TURN (ICE) as the NAT traversal method used by the system.

NOTE: When NAT Traversal is set to STUN/TURN (ICE), both STUN and TURN fields can be completed. ICE then automatically determines the appropriate method for traversal.

② STUN Server Address — Specify the IP address or domain name of the STUN server to be used.
③ STUN Port — Specify the port number of the STUN server.
4 TURN Server Address — Specify the IP address or domain name of the TURN server to be used.
⑤ TURN Port — Specify the port number of the TURN server.
⑥ TURN Username (optional) — Enter the username for the TURN server, if one is required.
⑦ TURN Password (optional) — Enter the password for the TURN server, if one is required.
⑧ Apply Button — Click Apply to commit changes.

NOTE: When changes are committed with the Apply button, network services on the DMP 128 Plus restart. This process can take up to 30 seconds.

NOTE: For more information regarding VoIP network configuration, refer to the DMP 128 Plus product page on www.extron.com.

Line Pages

Click a Line tab for configuration options. There are three pages used for line configuration.

Registration Page

DMP 128 Plus C V AT Digital audio matrix processor with AEC, VoIP, and Dante Firmware: v1.01.0006 Home Network Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Logs System Registration Audio Dealing Registration ① User Name: ② Authentication User Name: ③ Authentication Password: ④ Display Name: ⑤ Primary Proxy Name/TP: ⑥ Primary Proxy Port: * Denotes Required Field ⑦ Advanced ⑧ Status: Not Configured ⑨

Figure 210. VoIP Line Registration Page

To register a SIP account:

1. In the User Name field (see figure 210, ① above), enter the user name currently assigned to the DMP 128 Plus through the call server.

NOTE: "User Name" is referred to as "Line Extension" by some call servers.

1. In the Authentication User Name field (②), enter a name for the line (optional). In some cases, this will be the same as the user name entered in step 1.
2. In the Authentication Password field (③), enter the call server registration password.

NOTE: If a password is not required by the call server, leave this field blank.

1. In the Display Name field (④), enter a display name for the line (optional).
2. In the Primary Proxy Name/IP field (⑤), enter the call server IP address or domain name.
3. In the Primary Proxy Port field (⑥), enter the SIP traffic port number.

NOTE: If no port number is specified by the user, 5060 is used by default.

1. Click Apply (7) to commit the changes to the DMP 128 Plus (click Clear to clear all fields). Committing the changes does not initiate line registration with the call server.
2. Click Register (⑧) to initiate registration with the call server. Registration is confirmed in the Status field next to the Register button.

NOTE: If registration is unsuccessful, refer to the logs page (see Logs Page on page 177) and contact the VoIP system administrator.

NOTES:

• To unregister a line from the call server, click Unregister (⑨).
• To clear data from a field, delete the data from the field and click Apply (7).

Advanced Options

The Advanced ribbon (see figure 210, 10 on the previous page) at the bottom of the page allows a secondary proxy to be specified for redundancy purposes.

Audio Page

On the Audio page, codecs can be added or removed from the selected line. Codecs added to the line are available during call negotiation. A minimum of one codec must be present in the Assigned column. Codecs placed higher on the list are treated as preferred codecs during call negotiation.

DMP 128 Plus C V AT Digital audio matrix processor with AEC, VoIP, and Dante Firmware: v1.01.0006 Home Network Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Logs System Registration Audio Dialing Audio Audio Codec Codes ① Available ② Assigned g711u + g722 g711a + g711u g722 + g711a g722.1-24 g722.1-32 g722.1c-24 g722.1c-32 g722.1c-46 g726-16 g726-24 g726-32 g726-40 Apply

Figure 211. VoIP Line Audio Configuration Page

To add a codec to the Assigned column:

1. Select the desired codec in the Available column (see figure 211, ① above).
2. Click the right arrow (②) button between the two columns.
3. The codec moves from the Available column to the Assigned column (③).

To change codec priority in the Assigned column:

1. Select a codec in the Assigned column (①).
2. Click and drag that codec to the desired position in the list.

To remove a codec from the Assigned column:

1. Select the codec in the Assigned column ( ①).
2. Click the left arrow button between the two columns (④).
3. The codec moves from the Assigned column to the Available column (③).
   Click Apply to commit changes to codec configuration.

Dialing Page

The Dialing page allows dialing behavior to be configured for the selected line.

DMP 128 Plus C V AT Digital audio matrix processor with AEC, VoIP, and Dante Firmware: v1.01.0002 Name Network Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Logs System Registration Audio Dialing Dialing DTMEF Delivery Mode In-band Auto-Answer On Delay (seconds) 6 Apply

① DTMF Delivery Mode

③ Delay (seconds) Field

② Auto-answer Drop-Down

④ Apply Button

Figure 212. VoIP Line Dialing Page

① DTMF Delivery Mode — Select the DTMF delivery mode.

NOTE: Always consult with the VoIP system administrator to determine the correct DTMF mode.

② Auto-answer Drop-Down — Use this drop-down menu to turn auto-answer features On or Off.

③ Delay (seconds) Field — If auto-answer is enabled, enter the amount of delay in seconds before the call is automatically answered.

④ Apply Button — After configuring the dialing behavior of the selected line, click Apply to commit the changes to the line.

Logs Page

The Logs page provides a running log of SIP transaction relating to all lines on the device. Issues such as registration errors and call failures can be identified on this page without having to use external troubleshooting tools.

DMP 128 Plus C V AT Digital audio matrix processor with AEC, VoIP, and Dante Firmware: v1.01.0002 Extron. Logged in at admin Phone Network Time 1 Time 2 Time 3 Time 4 Time 5 Time 6 Time 7 Time 8 Log Report 2017-07-07T17-03:17Z --- SP-MESSAGE (IN) --- OPTIONS: exp(100)P(92.168.50.19.5068 SPS2.0 Vis: SP2.0/UDP 192.168.50.29.5068 branch=198G4K66L20H44 Max Forwarder: 79 Contact: To: From: "Unknown" > To: ① Log Window ② Active Checkbox ③ Clear Display Button ④ Export Button

Figure 213. VoIP Logs Page

① Log Window — Displays SIP transaction, including SDP. ② Active Checkbox — This box is unchecked by default. Check this box to activate transaction logging. ③ Clear Display Button — Clears all log data currently in the log window. 4 Export Button — Exports the contents of the log window to a text file. The exported text file is automatically stored in the default download directory of the web browser. NOTE: For more information regarding VoIP logs, refer to the DMP 128 Plus product page on www.extron.com.

System Page

The System page allows users to export VoIP configurations to a JSON file. These configuration files are used to return DMP 128 Plus devices to a known VoIP configuration. Additionally, partial configurations (individual JSON fields) can be applied using the import tool. 

DMP 128 Plus C V AT Digital audio matrix processor with AEC, VoIP, and Dante Firmware: v1.01.0002 Home Network Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Logs System Import System Configuration Path: Browse Import Export System Configuration Export

Figure 214. VoIP System Page

To import a system configuration:

1. Click Browse (①) in the Import System Configuration panel. 2. Locate the system configuration file to be imported. 3. Click Import (②). NOTE: It may take up to 30 seconds to import settings. A dialog box opens to indicate a successful import.

To export a system configuration:

1. Click Export (③) in the Export System Configuration panel. 2. The exported JSON file is automatically stored in the default download directory of the web browser.

Special Characters

The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions. The device does not accept the following characters as part of preset names, device names, passwords, or locally create file names: $$ \{\text { space } \} + -, @ = ^ {\prime} [ ] \{\} < > ^ {\prime \prime};: \backslash |? $$

Extron Warranty

Extron Electronics warrants this product against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years from the date of purchase. In the event of malfunction during the warranty period attributable directly to faulty workmanship and/or materials, Extron Electronics will, at its option, repair or replace said products or components, to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore said product to proper operating condition, provided that it is returned within the warranty period, with proof of purchase and description of malfunction to:

USA, Canada, South America, and Central America:

Extron Electronics 1230 South Lewis Street Anaheim, CA 92805 U.S.A.

Japan:

Extron Electronics, Japan Kyodo Building, 16 Ichibancho Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0082 Japan

Europe and Africa:

Extron Europe Hanzeboulevard 10 3825 PH Amersfoort The Netherlands

China:

Extron China 686 Ronghua Road Songjiang District Shanghai 201611 China

Asia:

Extron Asia Pte Ltd 135 Joo Seng Road, #04-01 PM Industrial Bldg. Singapore 368363 Singapore

Middle East:

Extron Middle East Dubai Airport Free Zone F13, PO Box 293666 United Arab Emirates, Dubai This Limited Warranty does not apply if the fault has been caused by misuse, improper handling care, electrical or mechanical abuse, abnormal operating conditions, or if modifications were made to the product that were not authorized by Extron. NOTE: If a product is defective, please call Extron and ask for an Application Engineer to receive an RA (Return Authorization) number. This will begin the repair process. USA: 714.491.1500 or 800.633.9876 Europe: 31.33.453.4040 Asia: 65.6383.4400 Japan: 81.3.3511.7655 Units must be returned insured, with shipping charges prepaid. If not insured, you assume the risk of loss or damage during shipment. Returned units must include the serial number and a description of the problem, as well as the name of the person to contact in case there are any questions. Extron Electronics makes no further warranties either expressed or implied with respect to the product and its quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for any particular use. In no event will Extron Electronics be liable for direct, indirect, or consequential damages resulting from any defect in this product even if Extron Electronics has been advised of such damage. Please note that laws vary from state to state and country to country, and that some provisions of this warranty may not apply to you.